mn00273e v5 Alfoplus

ALFOplus

Access Link Full Outdoor

User Manual

MN.00273.E - 005

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft CorporationHP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

MN.00273.E - 005 1

Contents

Section 1.USER GUIDE 7

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 82.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK..................................................................... 8

2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 82.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8

2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................102.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................11

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL............................................................123.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL.................................................................................123.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................123.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12

Section 2.DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 15

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................154.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................175.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................175.2 APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................17

5.2.1 Functionality ..........................................................................................185.3 PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................216.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................216.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................23

6.2.1 Adaptive modulation ...............................................................................376.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................40

6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics ....................................................47

2 MN.00273.E - 005

6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................476.4.1 PoE injector ...........................................................................................48

6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality ...........................................................486.4.1.2 Code table...............................................................................496.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics ............................................................506.4.1.4 Connectors..............................................................................506.4.1.5 Description of alarms ................................................................50

6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................516.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................526.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................526.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................52

7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................537.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................53

7.1.1 Block diagram ........................................................................................537.1.2 Baseband processor ................................................................................56

7.1.2.1 Firmware ................................................................................567.1.2.2 Web Lct ..................................................................................56

7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................567.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports .........................................................................577.1.5 Synchronisation......................................................................................587.1.6 Adaptive code modulation ........................................................................597.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction ........................................................................61

7.2 LOOPS ............................................................................................................627.3 RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING ..................................................62

7.3.1 Rate limiting ..........................................................................................627.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2) ...............................62

7.4 CONGESTION AVOIDANCE .................................................................................657.5 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................71

7.5.1 Service layer OAM...................................................................................717.6 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON..................................................737.7 RMON COUNTERS.............................................................................................747.8 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......75

7.8.1 Priority RMON.........................................................................................757.8.2 Service RMON ........................................................................................76

7.9 SYNCHRONISM.................................................................................................767.10 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................787.11 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................797.12 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................80

7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces......................................................................81

Section 3.INSTALLATION 83

8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus....................................................................................838.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................838.2 GENERAL.........................................................................................................848.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................848.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................84

MN.00273.E - 005 3

8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................858.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools).85

8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................878.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...............................................................................87

8.7.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................878.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............87

8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................878.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................88

8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............898.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................89

8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................898.9.1.2 Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................90

8.10 WAVEGUIDE BENDING ......................................................................................908.11 ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION .....................................................................91

8.11.1 Installation procedure of optical box ..........................................................938.12 USER CONNECTORS........................................................................................100

8.12.1 Auxiliary connector ...............................................................................1018.12.2 RJ45 connector.....................................................................................1038.12.3 Optical connector ..................................................................................1138.12.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure .............................................................1168.12.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure ..........................................................116

Section 4.LINE-UP 123

9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus ............................................................................................1239.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................1239.2 SWITCH ON ...................................................................................................1239.3 ALARM LED CHECK .........................................................................................1249.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE...............................................................................1249.5 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE ...........................................................................1289.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT...............................1339.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT....................................................1369.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................137

9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability ..................................................................1379.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE ........................................................................................138

9.9.1 Scope..................................................................................................1389.9.2 Procedure of firmware update.................................................................139

9.10 BACKUP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS...........................................................................................1409.10.1 Scope..................................................................................................1409.10.2 Backup/Restore Configuration using SCT..................................................1419.10.3 Backup/Restore Configuration using WEBLCT............................................141

4 MN.00273.E - 005

Section 5.MAINTENANCE 143

10 ALFOPlus ALARMS AND LOOPS...............................................................................14310.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................14310.2 ALARMS ........................................................................................................143

10.2.1 Alarm indications ..................................................................................14310.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms................................................................144

11 ALFOPlus MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................14711.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................14711.2 MAINTENANCE ...............................................................................................147

11.2.1 Periodical checks ..................................................................................14711.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ................................................148

11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................148

Section 6.PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 149

12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION.......................................................................14912.1 GENERAL.......................................................................................................14912.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET..................................................................149

12.2.1 General ...............................................................................................15012.2.2 Configurability ......................................................................................15412.2.3 Address ...............................................................................................15412.2.4 Restore supervisioning access mode ........................................................154

Section 7.COMPOSITION 155

13 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................15513.1 GENERALS.....................................................................................................15513.2 ODU PART NUMBER ........................................................................................155

Section 8.RF CHARACTERISTICS 167

14 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................16714.1 GENERALS.....................................................................................................167

MN.00273.E - 005 5

15 ALFOplus 7 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................16815.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................16815.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................168

15.2.1 Available frequencies.............................................................................16815.2.2 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................18015.2.3 Receiver characteristics .........................................................................181

16 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................18216.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................18216.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................182


17 ALFOPLUS 13GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................19017.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................19017.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................190


18 ALFOPLUS 15GHz CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................19518.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................19518.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................195


19 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................20519.1 FOREWORD ...................................................................................................20519.2 GENERAL.......................................................................................................205







6 MN.00273.E - 005


Section 9.LISTS AND SERVICES 229

23 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................229

24 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................233

25 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................237

MN.00273.E - 005 7

Section 1.USER GUIDE

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE MICROELETTRONICA Via Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy

DECLARESTHAT THE PRODUCTS

Digital Radio Relay System ALFOpluscomply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the

R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)and therefore are marked:

The following standards have been applied:

EN 60950-1:2006 and EN 60950-22:2006“Safety of information technology equipment”

EN 301 489-4 v.1.4.1. (2009-5)“Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); ElectroMag-netic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4: Specific conditions for fixedradio links and ancillary equipment and services”

ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 v1.4.1 (2010-7)“Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas;Part2-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital sys-tems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied.”

The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirementsof the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classifica-tion of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated iden-tifiers, the transmitting equipment shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:

Cologno Monzese, 20/06/2012 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA Chairman and Executive Officer Alberto Mascetti

8 MN.00273.E - 005

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the lineswitches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-ductor.

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedurefor mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whileartificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

Warning

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

MN.00273.E - 005 9

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

Step Description Figure

1

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body. If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his

stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-

tures, chewing gum, etc.).

2

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under the patient’s head and one under his neck.

Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far as possible.

3

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers

closed together.

While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

4

With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

5

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his

nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must

be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

6

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-

certained his death.

10 MN.00273.E - 005

2.2 SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-nents electrostatic charge sensitive.

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerousfor eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.

Fig.4 - Laser indication

MN.00273.E - 005 11

2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). Thismarking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with otherhousehold wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or humanhealth from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle itresponsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact eitherthe retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where andhow they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplierand check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

12 MN.00273.E - 005

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate andmaintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.

Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management programwindows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help–on line.

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

• a basic understanding of microwave transmission

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.

Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 – User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of themanual.

Section 2 – Description and specifications

It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.

Section 3 – Installation

The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

MN.00273.E - 005 13

Section 4 – Line–Up

Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 – Maintenance

The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify thefaulty unit and to re–establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.

Section 6 – Programming and supervision

The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-ready available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented andindicates if descriptions are already available.

Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 7 – Composition

Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 8 – RF characteristics

ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.

Section 9 – Indexes and services

Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.

14 MN.00273.E - 005

MN.00273.E - 005 15

Section 2.DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS

What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:

- ACM Adaptive Code Modulation

- AGC Automatic Gain Control

- ATPC Automatic Transmitted Power Control

- BBP Base Band Processor

- BER Bit Error Rate

- CBS Committed Burst Size

- CF Coupling Flag

- CIR Committed Information Rate

- CoS Class of Service

- CVID Customer VLAN Identifier

- DSCP Differentiated Serviced Code Point

- EBS Excess Burst Size

- EIR Excess Information Rate

- ELP Ethernet Line Protection

- EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection

- FPGA Field Programmable Gate-Array

- IP ToS Type of Service IP

- LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk

- LAN Local Area Network

16 MN.00273.E - 005

- LLF Link Loss Forwarding

- LNA Low Noise Amplifier

- MAC Media Access Control

- MDI Medium Dependent Interface

- MDX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

- MEF Metro Ethernet Forum

- NE Network Element

- OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

- ODU Outdoor Unit

- PLL Phase Locked Loop

- POE Power Over Ethernet

- PToS Priority Type of Service

- QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

- RED Random Early Drop

- RF Radio Frequency

- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

- RX Direction from antenna to user

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal

- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

- SVID Service VLAN Identifier

- TX Direction from user to antenna

- UNI User Network Interface

- VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

- VID Virtual Lan Identifier

- VLAN Virtual LAN

- WEBLCT WEB Local Craft Terminal

- WRR Weighted Round Robin

MN.00273.E - 005 17

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1 GENERAL

ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high ca-pacity Ethernet transport (1 Gbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adaptivecode modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).

There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This doc-ument provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.

5.2 APPLICATIONS

ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typicalrequirements are Ethernet connections:

• full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network

• fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul

• ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network

• complementary solutions for fibre deploy

• last mile fibre extension for business customers

• ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections

• emergency wireless links

• zero footprint applications

ALFOplus doesn’t need any indoor unit; power supply can be directly by POE+ through the data cable orthrough a dedicated auxiliary port. It’s available 1+0 radio system configurable via software following twoversions of ALFOplus:

• Electrical Gigabit Version

- LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock, synchronism recoveryand PoE

- LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recov-ery

• Optical Gigabit Version

- LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery

- LAN2 - 1x100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock, synchronism recovery andPoE

depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.

18 MN.00273.E - 005

5.2.1 Functionality

SIAE ALFOplus radio system presents the same functionalities of a “switch” (Layer 2).

ALFOplus radio system is able to forward Virtual LAN in transparent way or to manage incoming traffic fil-tering it or tagging it or dividing it in different VLAN. Traffic Flow control and Traffic priority capabilities canbe enabled or disabled via LAN software.

ALFOplus Ethernet switch functionality:

• MAC switching, Learning and Ageing

• Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes

• MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services

• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/IEEE VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting

• LLF (Link Loss Forwarding)

• IEEE 802.3x Flow control

• Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,802.1p rewrite with MPLS

• Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed

• Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

• Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header Ethernet compressor algorithm

• IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1ag ITU-T y.1731 OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)

• IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet 1

• Complete Synchronisation Management IEEE 1588 v2 precision time protocol and SSM G8264(quality SyncE)

• Advanced Statistics Monitoring Based VLAN and Priority

• Ethernet performance monitoring - RMon

5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY

ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via softwareto perform the following functions:

• radio link management

- capacity and modulation

- Link ID

- Tx frequency and power

- ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)

• main management

- IP port configurable and supervisioning

- routing table

- remote element list

- alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)

1 With dispensation to maximum power

MN.00273.E - 005 19

- user manager (password, user, SNMP login)

• operation and maintenance

- permanent Tx Off

- Rx signal threshold alarm

- performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold

- S/N measure

- LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority

- back-up/restore configuration

- software update

- report&logger maintenance (inventory, fault, commands)

- SNTP alignment

• manual operations (depends on timeout)

- Tx transmitter OFF

- force switch synch

- radio BER test

- baseband loop

- Ethernet port loop

• Ethernet switch management and functionalities

• synchronisation

More links can be managed by LAN access (see Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION).

20 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view

254 m

m

254 mm

157 m

m

MN.00273.E - 005 21

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

For more details, refer to Section 8. RF CHARACTERISTICS.

6.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

The equipment complies with the following international standard:

- EMC EN 301 489-4

- RF channel arrangement see Tab.2

Tab.2 - RF channel arrangement

Frequency band (GHz) Duplex Spacing Channel number Subbands

6L ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz 3CH @ 29.65MHz 4

6U ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz 3CH @ 40MHz 2

7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.1 - 7.4 168 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.7 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3

7.4 - 7.7 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3



7.7 - 8.2 ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz 4CH @ 29.65MHz 4

7.9 - 8.5 CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

8.2 - 8.5 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3


11 CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz 4CH @ 40MHz 3

13 ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3

15 ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4

15 ITU-R F636 - 490 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4

15 ITU-R F636 - 644 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 2

15 CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 1

22 MN.00273.E - 005

- Digital fixed point to point EN 301 128

- Climatic characteristics EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

- Safety EN60950

15 CEPT - 315 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5

15 CEPT - 322 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5

17 SRD ERC REC 70-03 (unlicensed) 12CH @ 28 MHz 1

18 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz 15CH @ 27.5MHz 1

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 2

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3

23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3

26 ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 16CH @ 28MHz 2

32 ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz 10CH @ 28MHz 3

38 ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz 20CH @ 28MHz 2

42 ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz 18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz) 3

MN.00273.E - 005 23

6.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

- Tx power see Tab.3

- Tolerance ± 2dB

Tab.3 - Tx power

- RF output attenuation up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable

- Automatic transmit power control (ATPC range 20 dB, implemented in 1dB step

- Remote transmit power control (RTPC range 20 dB, implemented

- Transmitter return loss GB8000 15 dBGB9000 6 dB

- Stability in frequency ±5ppm, ±10ppm (including ageing)

- Muting 60dB, related to maximum transmitted power

- Receiver threshold see Tab.4

ALFOplus series Nominal output power (dBm)

Frequency Band (GHz) 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 256LQAM 512QAM 1KQAM

6 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23

7 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23

8 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23

10.5 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 24 23

11 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22

13 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22

15 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 23 22

17 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 17

18 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 18

23 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 18

26 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 17

28 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 17 16

32 20 20 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 16 15

38 19 19 17 17 15 15 15 15 15 15 14

42 17 17 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 13 12

24 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled)

6 GHz

Radio Nominal RSL Threshold (dBm) Physical Mode

Channel bandwidth MHz 4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM

7BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

BER=10-10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

10BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -83.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -67.5

BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

14BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

30BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

Radio Guaranteed RSL Threshold (dBm) Physical Mode


7BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

10BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

14BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

30BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

MN.00273.E - 005 25

7 GHz



7BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5

BER=10-10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

14BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

28BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

56BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5



7BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

26 MN.00273.E - 005

11 GHz



7BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

BER=10-10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5

10BER=10-6 -94.0 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.0

BER=10-10 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

30BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

40BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0



7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

10BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

30BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

40BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

MN.00273.E - 005 27

13 GHz



7BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

BER=10-10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0



7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

28 MN.00273.E - 005

15 GHz



7BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0

BER=10-10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

14BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0

BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

28BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

56BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0



7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

MN.00273.E - 005 29

17 GHz



7BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5



7BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 76.0 72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.4

30 MN.00273.E - 005

18 GHz



7BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

BER=10-10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

10BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

14BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

20BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

30BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

40BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

50BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5



7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

10BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

20BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

30BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

40BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

50BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

MN.00273.E - 005 31

23 GHz



7BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5

BER=10-10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

10BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

14BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

20BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

30BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

40BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

50BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5



7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

10BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

20BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

30BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

40BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

50BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

32 MN.00273.E - 005

26 GHz



7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0



7BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0

14BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.5

56BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0

MN.00273.E - 005 33

28 GHz



7BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5



7BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

34 MN.00273.E - 005

32 GHz



7BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0

10BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

14BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0

20BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

28BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

30BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

40BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

50BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

56BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

BER=10-10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0



7BER=10-6 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0

10BER=10-6 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

14BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.0 -66.0 -63.0 -59.0

20BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.5 -57.5

28BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5

30BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0

40BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

50BER=10-6 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

56BER=10-6 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0

BER=10-10 -81.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -69.0 -66.5 -63.5 -60.0 -57.5 -53.0

MN.00273.E - 005 35

38 GHz



7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

10BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

20BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

30BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

40BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

50BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5



7BER=10-6 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5

10BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

14BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

20BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.0 -65.0 -62.0 -58.0

28BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0

30BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5

40BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

BER=10-10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0

50BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0

56BER=10-6 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

36 MN.00273.E - 005

- Modulation 4QAM up to 1024QAM

- Number of settable RF channel depending on RF band and capacity

- Tuning frequency step 250 KHz

- Noise figure see Tab.5

Tab.5 - Noise figure

42 GHz



7BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5



7BER=10-6 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -85.0 -81.5 78.5 76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5

14BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5 -58.5

28BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 54.5

BER=10-10 -80.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -68.5 -66.0 -63.0 -59.5 -57.0 -52.5

Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)

6 6

7 6

11 6.5

13 6.5

15 6.5

17 8

18 7

23 7

26 8.5

28 8

MN.00273.E - 005 37

- Link ID identifier RFOH: 1 to 255

- Spurious emissions/rejection according to ETSI

- Max RSL threshold see Tab.6

Tab.6 - Max RSL Thresold

6.2.1 Adaptive modulation

ALFOplus ODU’s implement an adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when the qualityof the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.

The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.7.

Tab.7 - ACM switching thresholds

32 9.5

38 9

42 10

Max receive signal level Threshold (dBm)

Without degradation -25

With degradation up to BER 10-6 -22

Without permanent damage -10

7MHz Bandwidth Power (Estim.)

BER 10-6

(Estim.)Down-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 6.4 13.2 13.2

4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0

16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5

16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.5 5.0

32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.5 6.3

64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.6 5.0

256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.6

512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.1

1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 6.4 0 0 13.2 0 13.2 0

4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0

16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5

16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.45 5.0

Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)

38 MN.00273.E - 005

32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.45 6.25

64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.75

128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.625 5.0

256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.625

512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.125

1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 0 4.5 0 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.8 13.2 13.2

4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.6 5.0 20.1 5.0

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.6 3 19.5 5.0 19.5 7.5

16QAM -2.5 14.5 17.5 3 22 5.0 23.3 5.0

32QAM -3.75 17 20 3 25.7 5.0 25.5 6.3

64QAM -3.5 19.7 23.2 3.5 27.7 6.0 27.7 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.7 3 30.8 5.0 31.4 5.0

256QAM -4.125 25.8 28.8 3 33.9 5.0 33.9 5.6

512QAM -4.25 28.9 31.9 3 36.7 a 5.0 36.7 5.1

1KQAM -4.25 32.2 35.2 b 3 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6 27.2 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

MN.00273.E - 005 39

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

40 MN.00273.E - 005

6.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS

Ethernet interface

All ports can be “transmitters or sources” of the synchronism through Synchronous Ethernet.

- Ethernet connectors IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45IEEE 802.3 100/1000BaseX LC

- Ethernet switch functionality MAC Switching, Learning and AgeingJumbo frame up to 10 kbytesIEEE 802.3af PoE-Power Over EthernetIEEE 802.1Q VLANIEEE 802.1ad QinQ-VLAN StackingVLAN rewriting (Radio side)Link Loss Forwarding (LLF)IEEE 802.3x Flow ControlIEEE 802.1p QoS/DSCPIEEE 802.1w RSTP-Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1ag OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)G.8264 SyncE Quality Management (SSM)Hard limiting or WRED (Software selectable)Enhanced Ethernet Prioritization based on MPLS “ExpBits”Ethernet frame fragmentation (radio side)Selective QinQ based on VLAN and 802.1p priorityCIR/EIR rate Management, based on outer Tag or input priority (radio side)Multi Layer Packet Compression (up to 128kbytes-configurable radio side)Advanced statistics monitoring based on VLAN and priorityEthernet performance monitoring-RMON

- Ethernet latency see Tab.8


BER 10-6


Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift (Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

Up-shift(Estim.)

Margin (Estim.)

4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7

4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5

16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0

16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5

32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8

64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8

128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5

256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1

512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6

1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

a. ALFOplus42 = 36.2 dB

b. ALFOplus42 = 34.7 dB

MN.00273.E - 005 41

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus

One way delay (msec) Packet size 64 bytes

Bandwidth (MHz) 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1K QAM

7 1.100 1.083 1.069 1.064 1.060 1.056 1.054 1.051 1.049

10 0.925 0.914 0.904 0.900 0.897 0.894 0.893 0.980 0.889

14 0.649 0.641 0.634 0.632 0.629 0.627 0.626 0.625 0.624

20 0.464 0.459 0.453 0.451 0.450 0.449 0.448 0.447 0.447

28 0.329 0.325 0.321 0.320 0.319 0.318 0.318 0.317 0316

30 0.311 0.306 0.304 0.303 0.302 0.302 0.300 0.300 0.299

40 0.237 0.233 0.232 0.231 0.230 0.230 0.229 0.229 0.228

50 0.193 0.190 0.188 0.188 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186

56 0.170 0.168 0.166 0.166 0.165 0.164 0.164 0.164 0.163



7 1.148 1.120 1.095 1.088 1.078 1.071 1.068 1.063 1.060

10 0.960 0.940 0.922 0.916 0.909 0.905 0.903 0.900 0.898

14 0.674 0.660 0.648 0.644 0.639 0.636 0.634 0.632 0.630

20 0.483 0.473 0.464 0.461 0.458 0.456 0.455 0.453 0.451

28 0.342 0.335 0.329 0.327 0.324 0.323 0.322 0.321 0.321

30 0.323 0.293 0.289 0.283 0.285 0.283 0.282 0.282 0.303

40 0.266 0.241 0.238 0.233 0.235 0.233 0.232 0.232 0.231

50 0.201 0.197 0.193 0.192 0.191 0.190 0.190 0.189 0.188

56 0.177 0.174 0.171 0.169 0.169 0.168 0.167 0.167 0.167



7 1.247 1.194 1.146 1.132 1.114 1.101 1.095 1.087 1.081

10 1.030 0.993 0.960 0.950 0.937 0.929 0.925 0.919 0.913

14 0.723 0.697 0.674 0.666 0.658 0.652 0.649 0.645 0.641

20 0.517 0.499 0.482 0.478 0.472 0.467 0.466 0.463 0.456

28 0.367 0.354 0.342 0.339 0.335 0.332 0.331 0.329 0.327

30 0.347 0.330 0.324 0.321 0.317 0.313 0.303 0.310 0.309

40 0.266 0.253 0.248 0.246 0.243 0.240 0.232 0.238 0.237

50 0.216 0.209 0.203 0.200 0.198 0.196 0.196 0.195 0.193

56 0.191 0.185 0.179 0.177 0.175 0.173 0.172 0.172 0.171



7 1.438 1.338 1.247 1.218 1.185 1.163 1.151 1.133 1.124

42 MN.00273.E - 005

10 1.167 1.096 1.032 1.013 0.989 0.973 0.965 0.952 0.944

14 0.820 0.770 0.725 0.712 0.695 0.684 0.678 0.669 0.664

20 0.587 0.553 0.521 0.511 0.499 0.492 0.488 0.482 0.478

28 0.418 0.393 0.371 0.364 0.356 0.350 0.347 0.343 0.341

30 0.394 0.364 0.351 0.343 0.336 0.330 0.328 0.325 0.323

40 0.303 0.280 0.270 0.264 0.258 0.254 0.252 0.250 0.247

50 0.246 0.233 0.220 0.216 0.212 0.209 0.207 0.205 0.203

56 0.218 0.206 0.195 0.191 0.187 0.185 0.183 0.181 0.179



7 1.824 1.628 1.450 1.395 1.329 1.284 1.261 1.228 1.208

10 1.443 1.305 1.181 1.143 1.096 1.065 1.049 1.026 1.007

14 1.014 0.917 0.830 0.803 0.770 0.748 0.737 0.721 0.711

20 0.726 0.658 0.597 0.579 0.556 0.540 0.532 0.521 0.513

28 0.519 0.470 0.426 0.414 0.397 0.386 0.380 0.372 0.368

30 0.489 0.432 0.405 0.392 0.377 0.368 0.360 0.363 0.348

40 0.376 0.332 0.311 0.301 0.290 0.283 0.277 0.279 0.269

50 0.307 0.280 0.256 0.248 0.239 0.233 0.229 0.225 0.221

56 0.272 0.248 0.227 0.220 0.212 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197



7 2.193 1.905 1.644 1.562 1.466 1.400 1.367 0.001 1.289

10 1.707 1.505 1.322 1.265 1.197 1.151 1.127 1.092 1.066

14 1.200 1.058 0.929 0.890 0.842 0.809 0.792 0.768 0.754

20 0.860 0.761 0.671 0.643 0.609 0.588 0.576 0.559 0.545

28 0.615 0.544 0.480 0.460 0.436 0.420 0.412 0.399 0.393

30 0.580 0.499 0.460 0.441 0.419 0.403 0.393 0.385 0.372

40 0.433 0.381 0.351 0.337 0.320 0.308 0.300 0.294 0.289

50 0.365 0.325 0.288 0.277 0.264 0.255 0.250 0.246 0.239

56 0.324 0.289 0.257 0.247 0.235 0.227 0.223 0.219 0.214



7 8.570 6.698 5.001 4.471 3.844 3.417 3.196 2.874 2.692

10 6.271 4.959 3.769 3.399 2.958 2.659 2.505 2.280 2.101

14 4.418 3.493 2.655 2.394 2.084 1.873 1.764 1.606 1.516

20 3.171 2.532 1.953 1.773 1.559 1.414 1.338 1.228 1.123


MN.00273.E - 005 43

- Guaranteed Ethernet throughput see Tab.9

Tab.9 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression and fragmentation

28 2.284 1.824 1.407 1.277 1.123 1.018 0.964 0.885 0.840

30 2.155 1.608 1.352 1.234 1.093 0.996 0.928 0.875 0.801

40 1.670 1.246 1.048 0.956 0.847 0.772 0.719 0.678 0.646

50 1.371 1.114 0.881 0.809 0.722 0.664 0.634 0.590 0.552

56 1.227 0.997 0.789 0.724 0.646 0.594 0.567 0.528 0.505

Bandwidth (MHz) ModulationFrame size (byte)

64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000

7

4QAMs 10.3 9.8 9.6 9.4 9.4 9.3 9.3

4QAM 12.0 11.5 11.2 11.0 11.0 10.9 10.9

16QAMs 17.9 17.2 16.7 16.5 16.4 16.3 16.2

16QAM 23.3 22.3 21.7 21.4 21.2 21.2 21.1

32QAM 27.1 25.9 25.2 24.9 24.7 24.6 24.5

64QAM 33.5 32.0 31.2 30.8 30.5 30.5 30.3

128QAM 39.9 38.2 37.2 36.7 36.4 36.3 36.1

256QAM 46.3 44.3 43.2 42.6 42.2 42.1 41.9

512QAM 52.8 50.5 49.2 48.5 48.1 48.0 47.8

1024QAM 59.2 56.6 55.2 54.4 54.0 53.9 53.6

10

4QAMs 12.6 12.1 11.7 11.6 11.5 11.5 11.4

4QAM 16.9 16.2 15.8 15.6 15.4 15.4 15.3

16QAMs 25.3 24.2 23.6 23.2 23.1 23.0 22.9

16QAM 32.8 31.4 30.6 30.2 29.9 29.9 29.7

32QAM 38.2 36.5 35.5 35.0 34.8 34.7 34.5

64QAM 47.2 45.1 44.0 43.4 43.0 42.9 42.7

128QAM 56.3 53.8 52.4 51.7 51.3 51.2 50.9

256QAM 65.3 62.5 60.9 60.0 59.5 59.4 59.1

512QAM 74.4 71.1 69.3 68.3 67.8 67.6 67.3

1024QAM 83.4 79.8 77.7 76.6 76.1 75.9 75.5


44 MN.00273.E - 005

14

4QAMs 18.1 17.3 16.9 16.6 16.5 16.5 16.4

4QAM 24.3 23.3 22.7 22.4 22.2 22.1 22.0

16QAMs 36.3 34.7 33.9 33.4 33.1 33.0 32.9

16QAM 47.2 45.1 44.0 43.4 43.0 42.9 42.7

32QAM 54.8 52.4 51.1 50.4 50.0 49.9 49.6

64QAM 67.8 64.9 63.2 62.3 61.8 61.7 61.4

128QAM 80.8 77.3 75.3 74.3 73.7 73.5 73.2

256QAM 93.8 89.8 87.4 86.2 85.6 85.4 85.0

512QAM 106.9 102.3 99.6 98.2 97.5 97.3 96.8

1024QAM 120.0 114.7 111.8 110.2 109.4 109.1 108.6

20

4QAMs 25.7 24.6 23.9 23.6 23.4 23.4 23.3

4QAM 34.5 33.0 32.1 31.7 31.5 31.4 31.2

16QAMs 51.5 49.2 48.0 47.3 46.9 46.8 46.6

16QAM 66.9 64.0 62.3 61.4 61.0 60.8 60.6

32QAM 77.7 74.3 72.4 71.4 70.8 70.7 70.3

64QAM 96.1 91.9 89.6 88.3 87.6 87.4 87.0

128QAM 114.6 109.6 106.7 105.2 104.4 104.2 103.7

256QAM 133.0 127.2 123.9 122.2 121.3 121.0 120.4

512QAM 151.4 144.8 141.1 139.1 138.1 137.7 137.1

1024QAM 169.9 162.5 158.3 156.0 154.9 154.5 153.8

28

4QAMs 36.4 34.8 33.9 33.5 33.2 33.1 33.0

4QAM 48.9 46.8 45.6 45.0 44.6 44.5 44.3

16QAMs 73.0 69.9 68.1 67.1 66.6 66.4 66.1

16QAM 94.9 90.8 88.4 87.2 86.5 86.3 85.9

32QAM 110.2 105.4 102.7 101.2 100.5 100.2 99.8

64QAM 136.4 130.4 127.1 125.3 124.3 124.0 123.5

128QAM 162.5 155.4 151.4 149.3 148.2 147.8 147.2

256QAM 188.7 180.4 175.8 173.3 172.0 171.6 170.8

512QAM 215.0 205.6 200.3 197.5 196.0 195.5 194.7

1024QAM 241.2 230.7 224.7 221.5 219.9 219.3 218.4


64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000

MN.00273.E - 005 45

30

4QAMs 38.8 37.1 36.2 35.7 35.4 35.3 35.1

4QAM 52.2 49.9 48.6 47.9 47.5 47.4 47.2

16QAMs 77.8 74.4 72.5 71.5 71.0 70.8 70.5

16QAM 101.1 96.7 94.2 92.9 92.2 92.0 91.6

32QAM 117.4 112.3 109.4 107.9 107.1 106.8 106.3

64QAM 145.3 139.0 135.4 133.5 132.5 132.2 131.6

128QAM 173.2 165.6 161.4 159.1 157.9 157.5 156.8

256QAM 201.0 192.3 187.3 184.7 193.3 182.8 182.0

512QAM 228.9 218.9 213.3 210.3 208.7 208.2 207.3

1024QAM 256.8 245.6 239.2 235.9 234.1 233.5 232.5

40

4QAMs 64.2 61.4 59.8 59.0 58.5 58.4 58.1

4QAM 86.2 82.5 80.4 79.2 78.6 78.4 78.1

16QAMs 128.7 123.1 119.9 118.2 117.4 117.1 116.5

16QAM 167.2 159.9 155.8 153.6 152.5 152.1 151.4

32QAM 194.2 185.8 181.0 178.4 177.1 176.6 175.9

64QAM 240.3 229.8 223.9 220.7 219.1 218.6 217.6

128QAM 286.4 273.9 266.9 263.1 261.1 260.5 259.3

256QAM 332.5 318.0 309.8 305.4 303.1 302.4 301.1

512QAM 378.6 362.1 352.7 347.7 345.2 344.3 342.8

1024QAM 424.7 406.2 395.7 390.1 387.2 386.2 384.5

50

4QAMs 64.2 61.4 59.8 59.0 58.5 58.4 58.1

4QAM 86.2 82.5 80.4 79.2 78.6 78.4 78.1

16QAMs 128.7 123.1 119.9 118.2 117.4 117.1 116.5

16QAM 167.2 159.9 155.8 153.6 152.5 152.1 151.4

32QAM 194.2 185.8 181.0 178.4 177.1 176.6 175.9

64QAM 240.3 229.8 223.9 220.7 219.1 218.6 217.6

128QAM 286.4 273.9 266.9 263.1 261.1 260.5 259.3

256QAM 332.5 318.0 309.8 305.4 303.1 302.4 301.1

512QAM 378.6 362.1 352.7 347.7 345.2 344.3 342.8

1024QAM 424.7 406.2 395.7 390.1 387.2 386.2 384.5


64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000

46 MN.00273.E - 005

56

4QAMs 72.8 69.7 67.9 66.9 66.4 66.3 66.0

4QAM 97.6 93.6 91.2 89.9 89.2 89.0 88.6

16QAMs 146.1 139.7 136.1 134.2 133.2 132.9 132.3

16QAM 189.8 191.5 176.8 174.3 173.0 172.6 171.8

32QAM 220.4 210.8 205.4 202.5 201.0 200.5 199.6

64QAM 272.7 260.8 254.1 250.5 248.7 248.0 246.9

128QAM 325.0 310.9 302.8 298.6 296.3 295.6 294.3

256QAM 377.3 360.9 351.6 346.6 344.0 343.2 341.7

512QAM 430.0 411.3 400.7 395.0 392.1 391.1 389.4

1024QAM 482.3 461.3 449.4 443.0 439.7 438.7 436.7


64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000

MN.00273.E - 005 47

6.3.1 Ethernet optical interface characteristics

The optical interface can be specialized for the different applications by insertion of the proper transceiveron the unit.

Tab.10 - Interface characteristics

6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE

ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE + IEEE 802.at (with exceeding maximum power). Powersupply can be provided at the LAN1 (ALFOplus GE) or LAN2 (ALFOplus GO).

In case of external PoE injector, verify that it has overcurrent protection. Power supply can be provided atthe LAN interface or at an auxiliary separated connector at the same time. The maximum length of CAT5ecable (that carries data+PoE) is 100m.

- Operating voltage range 48Vdc ±15%

- Power consumption 2 see Tab.11

Tab.11 - Power consumption (W)

Parameter

Gigabit 100 Mbit/s

Single Mode Multi Mode Multi Mode

9/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm

Operating Distance up to 10km up to 550m up to 2km

Optical Center Wavelength 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm

Optical Transmit Power -3 ÷ -9.5 dBm -2 ÷ -9.5 dBm -14 ÷ -22 dBm

Receive Sensitivity -19 dBm -17 dBm -29 dBm

Average Receive Power Max -3 dBm 0 dBm -14 dBm

Link Power Budget 9.5 dB 7.5 dB 7 dB

Compliance 1000BaseLX IEEE 802.3z

1000BaseSX IEEE 802.3z

1000BaseFX IEEE 802.3z100BaseFx IEEE 802.3z

Transceiver Type Pluggable

Connectors Type LC

2 Power consumption with negligible cable length.

Power consumption (W)

Frequency band Typical Guaranteed

6 t.b.d. t.b.d.

7 37 39

8 37 39

11 35 37

48 MN.00273.E - 005

In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply48Volt (see Fig.60). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.

6.4.1 PoE injector

Tab.12 - PoE injector supported

6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality

The equipment presented in this paragraph is a SIAE IDU that provides power to the ODU ALFOplusthrough the LAN cable.

SIAE Passive PoE Injector is a complete power management hot-swap with alarm indicators (over-currentprotection, excess-voltage and under-voltage lockout). The Ethernet traffic from “DATA” connector (input)is overlaid with power supply 48Volt into “DATA&Power” connector (Output). Below the details:

13 37 39

15 37 39

17 37 39

18 33.5 35

23 33.5 35

26 t.b.d. t.b.d.

32 t.b.d. t.b.d.

38 34 36

42 t.b.d. t.b.d.

Code Description

S03653 AC/DC 60W PoE injector

S03654 DC/DC 75W PoE injector

Power consumption (W)

Frequency band Typical Guaranteed

MN.00273.E - 005 49

Fig.7 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector)

Fig.8 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector)

6.4.1.2 Code table

Tab.13 - Code Table

Description Code

48 Vin 1 ports PoE injector C60507

48Vin 4 ports PoE injector C60506

50 MN.00273.E - 005

6.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics

Tab.14 - Electrical characteristics

6.4.1.4 Connectors

Tab.15 - Connectors

6.4.1.5 Description of alarms

Tab.16 - Description of alarms

Fig.9 - PoE injector interface

Vin 36..72Vdc (floating/pos. GND)

Iin (without ODU) 60mA (C60507), 120mA (C60506)

Alarm cable open on Iout=50mA ±20%

Alarm cable open off Iout=70mA ±20%

Iout MAX (per port) 1.45A ±10%

Inrush current ETS 300 132-2 mask compliant

Surge protection IEC 1000-4-5 Level 4 4KV compliant

Power supply 3 contacts plug P.3.81

ODU RJ45

Default polarity RJ45 V+(4.5) V-(7.8)

Optional polarity RJ45 V+(3.6) V-(1.2)

Alarm LED (yellow) Power LED (green) Meaning

On On Cable open

Off On Remote Power supply is OK

Blinking Off Cable short circuit

MN.00273.E - 005 51

6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE

- Type see Tab.17

Tab.17 - Type

- Maximum length see.Tab.18

Tab.18 - Maximum length

Frequency band Type

6 UDR 70

7 UBR 84

8 UBR 84

11 UBR 100

13 UDR 120

15 UDR 140

18 UBR 220

23 UBR 220

26 UBR 220

32 UBR 320

38 UBR 320

42 UBR 500

Waveguide maximum length

Channel spacing (m)

7 MHz 10

14 MHz 10

28 MHz 10

40 MHz 5

56 MHz 5

52 MN.00273.E - 005

6.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Physical size of system components:

Tab.19 - Dimensions

Weight of system components:

- ALFOplus < 4.5 kg

6.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

- Protection method: gas dischargers

- Gas discharger technical characteristics

- DC spark-over voltage 150V +/-20%

- Nominal impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 µs) 20kA

- Single impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 µs) 25kA

- Operation and storage temperature -40°C ÷ +90°C

- Performances in accordance to EN 301 489

6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

- Operating temperature range –33°C ÷ +55°C

- Survival temperature range (reduce MTBF) -40°C ÷ +70°C

- Operational humidity weatherproof according to IP65 environmentalclass

- Thermal resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C

- Wind resistance 150 km/h (in operation) 200 km/h (survival)

Solar shield on the ODU guarantees an additional protection against temperature increase.

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

ALFOplus 256 256 114

MN.00273.E - 005 53

7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

7.1 GENERAL

SIAE ALFOplus is a radio system for digital link in full outdoor mechanics.

ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from6 to 42 GHz.

The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured owing to its:

• reduced size

• easily orientable antenna

• broad operating temperature range

• high flexibility of line interfaces selection

• low consumption.

The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then thatof the line interfaces will follow.

7.1.1 Block diagram

The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:

• BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

or

• BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)

The description that follows (see Fig.10 and Fig.11) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical ver-sion.

54 MN.00273.E - 005

.

Fig.10 - ALFOplus GE

Ge

LAN

2Surg

e pro

tect

ion

& m

agnet

ics

Mai

n D

C/D

C,

Aux

DC/D

C

SW

DFP

GA

Ge

LAN

1

DA

DA

PW

AD

C

D

EM

AD

C

AD

C

PW

M

Mic

roco

ntr

olle

r

Aux

Pw

r Supply

Filter

RAM

SSD

Vga

Vga

° C

BBP:

bas

e ban

d p

roce

ssor

TRX:

IF a

nd R

F tr

ansc

eive

r

RAM

CO

NN

MII

AD

C

Surg

e pro

tect

ion,

mag

net

ics,

Poe

split

ter

QSPI

GM

II

GM

II

2xS

ync

Filter

Filter

Filter LO

LO MO

D

Dow

n c

onve

rter

,Agc

MN.00273.E - 005 55

Fig.11 - ALFOplus GO

Mai

n D

C/D

C,

Aux

DC/D

C

SW

D

FPG

A

DAC

MO

D

LO

AD

C

Dow

n c

onve

rter

, Agc

DEM

AD

C

Mic

roco

ntr

olle

r

Aux

Pw

r Supply

Filter

RAM

SSD

° C

BBP:

bas

e ban

d p

roce

ssor

TRX:

IF a

nd R

F tr

ansc

eive

r

RAM

AD

C

Go L

AN

1 (

SFP

1000Bas

eX)

GM

II

MII

QSPI

PH

Y

GM

IIG

MII

AD

C

Vga

VgaPW

M

PW

M

CO

NN

.

DAC

Filter

Filter

Filter

LO

Ge

LAN

2

Surg

e pro

tect

ion,

mag

net

ics,

PoE s

plit

ter

56 MN.00273.E - 005

7.1.2 Baseband processor

The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:

• primary and secondary power supply

• line interfaces and protections

• baseband circuits and packets processing

• I and Q signals generation and sampling

• I, Q demodulator

• Rx baseband filtering

• Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit

• FPGA debug connector

• FPGA

• Controller

BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).

7.1.2.1 Firmware

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed ontwo hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory benches: one con-taining the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firm-ware release to the stand-by bench without cutting the traffic. Use “Bench Switch” to activate the benchin stand-by (SW restart will be performed).

7.1.2.2 Web Lct

The Web Lct is a web interface software already present in the ALFOPlus, which requires Adobe Flash Playerand allows the configuration and the management of the local radio, using LAN Port Management. Whenthe remote one is configured properly, the whole link can be managed. WEB Lct runs on any browser (In-ternet Explorer or Firefox are recommended). Web Lct console is a free software downloadable from thesite www.siaemic.com after registration.

In order to transfer data, “WebLCT console” or “SCT” running is necessary.

7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit

TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:

• power supply dedicated to microwave circuits

• Tx baseband filtering

• I, Q modulator

• frequency synthesizer

• microwave transmitter and receiver

• IF devices on Rx side

MN.00273.E - 005 57

7.1.4 Switch for Ethernet ports

Inside ALFOplus is present an Ethernet switch with 2 external ports line side (electrical 10/100/1000BaseTor optical 100/1000BaseFX), one internal radio port and one port towards controller (see Fig.12).

Internal port is represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connectedwith the remote equipment.

Fig.12 - ALFOplus block diagram

Switch function

ALFOplus can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

• to connect two separate LANs

• to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

• to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater thanthe traffic in a single LAN.

By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, inWeb Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.

The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,it decides which LAN to send it:

• if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

• if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present intolocal address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

• otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

Take account the value of Max Packet Size (byte) when “802.1Q setting” is set as DISABLE or FALLBACKthe switch adds 4 Bytes for internal S_Tag. With 802.1Q setting in SECURE (that means that packet VIDmust be contained in Virtual LAN table list, otherwise the packet is discarded), no internal TAGs are added.

Ethernet Speed/Duplex function

With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automaticallyactivated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex canbe set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.

Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.

Ethernet packet switch

Port ARadio1+0

LAN1

LAN2

10/100BaseT1000BaseT

10/100/1000BaseT

Microcontroller

58 MN.00273.E - 005

If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking anytransmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.

With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is notavailable and can temporarily re-route the traffic.

MDI/MDIX cross-over

For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:

• Auto - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover cable)

• MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A

• MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B

With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on bothends. In case of straight cable is the opposite (MDI/MDI-X or MDI-X/MDI).

VLAN functionality

ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:

• a fixed word of 2 bytes

• 3 bits for priority according with 802.1p

• 1 fixed bit

• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only out-put ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.

Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)

A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.2x).

Port Based VLan

Port Based VLan (or Lan Per Port) allows to share the Ethernet traffic (Ingress or Egress) in the internalSIAE switch.

7.1.5 Synchronisation

Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SincE and defined by the standard G.8264, gets the syn-chronisation signal from the following different sources:

• LAN1

• LAN2

• radio

• Internal source

As shown in Fig.13 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses oneof the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.

This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss, Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the baseof assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential switch.

MN.00273.E - 005 59

The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required syn-chronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is usedfor the local restart.

Fig.13 - Synchronisation block diagram

7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation

ACM profiles

In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modu-lation profile depending on the Rx signal quality. Available ACM profiles are the following:

• 4QAM strong

• 4QAM

• 16QAM strong

• 16QAM

• 32QAM

• 64QAM

• 128QAM

• 256QAM

• 512QAM

• 1024QAM.

TE LAN-1

Clock SelectorSynchronisation Source

TE LAN-2

T2 Radio

Internal Clock

PLLCircuit

Sync Loss

Sync DriftStatus

T0 ReferenceClk

Alarms

Force SwitchPriority Control

Preferential Switch

Sel

ection L

ogic

al

60 MN.00273.E - 005

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

• 7 MHz

• 10 MHz

• 14 MHz

• 20 MHz

• 28 MHz

• 30 MHz

• 40 MHz

• 50 MHz

• 56 MHz

• 112 MHz (optional).

ACM switching

The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.

• Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modu-lation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectralefficiency

• Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the mod-ulation is reduced in the direction from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,

In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found betweenmax traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. Toobtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following pa-rameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.

ACM setting

The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through softwareconfiguration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.

• Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (highRx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: thehighest modulation profile that ACM can employ

• Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (lowRx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: thelowest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Tx Power Ramp

Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.

• Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile

• Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation

The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the LowerModulation that has been set.

MN.00273.E - 005 61

7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction

The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitterdepending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the localterminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higherthan 3 dB.

As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop atten-uation, a microprocessor (µP), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminalsends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.

A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) thanthe threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before thanthe received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. Thebehaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than beingforced to reduce capacity due to modulation downgrade.

Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,are not overlapped, as per Fig.14.

Fig.14 - ATPC diagram

Thresh High

Thresh Low

Hop attenuation (dB)

ATPC range

PTx max.

PTx min.

Remote PRxdBm

Local PTxdBm

Hop attenuation (dB)

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

PTx actuation

Local Remote

PRx recording

Transmission

of PTx control

µP µP

level

PTx control

ACMrange

Thresholdhighest ACM

profile

62 MN.00273.E - 005

7.2 LOOPS

To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The com-mands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:

• Line Loop (Ethernet Port Loop)

• Baseband loop

Fig.15 - Available loops

7.3 RATE LIMITING AND INGRESS FILTER POLICING

7.3.1 Rate limiting

In SIAE equipment it is possible to apply the Rate Limit, i.e. to limit the total rate passing through an in-terface. It is possible to apply the rate limiting from 64 kbit/s up to the maximum port speed (up to 1GE).

The values that can be inserted are pre-fixed from 64 kbit up to 10Mbit (64Kb, 128kb, 256kb, 512kb, 1Mb,2Mb, 3Mb, 4Mb, 5Mb, 6Mb, 7Mb, 8Mb and 9Mb), In the range from 10Mbit/s up to 1Gbit/s the limiting val-ues can be chosen by the user with a 10Mbit/s step. i.e. the minimum selectable granularity is 10Mb/s.

7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2)

SIAE equipment allows limiting the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:

• LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID andpriority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)

• VLAN (Bandwidth profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is notconsidered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with differentprofiles.

• VLAN + priority (Bandwidth profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couplesVLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is alwaysconsidered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same band-width profile.

ALFOplus

BBP-GE RADIO

BASEBANDLOOP

Tx

LINELOOP

Rx

PHYSICAL ETHERNET

PORT

MN.00273.E - 005 63

In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policyresources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN orVLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.

In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:

• CIR (Committed Information rate): it is the admitted ingress rate (“green” coloured), with valuesbetween 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s

• CBS (Committed Burst Rate): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, withvalues between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.

• EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate admitted when possible (“yellow” col-oured), with values between 0kbit/s and 1Gbit/s.

• EBS (Excess Burst Rate): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with valuesbetween 0 byte and 128 kbyte.

• CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token (if any) charged into the green bucket are movedinto the yellow packet bucket.

Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded. In other words, therate obtained with the sum of CIR+EIR is the maximum rate allowed to be transmitted.

The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, whichrepresents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.

According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the “bandwidth profile” service attribute (In-put Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC orper CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. Theservice provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employ-ing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy toensure compliance by user traffic.

• Green = Trasmitted: CIR and CBS.

• Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion): EIR and EBS.

• Red = Dropped: traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.

For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:

• Disable

• Uni Port Based

• EVC C_Vid Based

• COS C_Vid + Priority Based

• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based

• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based

According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =

• Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS andEBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vidwith CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to aSVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Into switch there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio port.

Any CVID can be used into only one port.

Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.

CIR (green) EIR (yellow) dropped (red)

CBS (green) EBS (yellow) dropped (red)

64 MN.00273.E - 005

Enhanced QoS Management

The SIAE switch scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. Based on the ingress port (andoptionally also as a function of the VLAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set thepriority of an Ethernet frame:

• Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)

• MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the MPLS tag (Native MPLS)

• IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)

• Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the Entering LANinterface. This Default configuration is a “Port Based” Priority with default priority value of 0 (lowestpriority). These priority values can be configured by the user within the range from 0 (lowest prior-ity) up to 7 (higher priority). The Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not ap-plicable.

It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS). Once the priority is assigned, the packet is sent to one of the 8 output queues.The size of each one of the 8 queues is configurable with one value between the following seven options:128kbit, 256kbit, 512kbit, 1024kbit, 2048kbit, 4096kbit and 8192kbit.

On the basis of the filling status of the queue, different drop-policy can be applied. In SIAE switch thereare four available policies:

• Tail drop: if the packet is arriving into a full queue, it will be discarded

• Queue drop: if a new packet is arriving into a full queue, the whole queue is emptied (with the ex-ception of the head packet)

• RED: when a new packet is arriving into the queue it has a discarding-probability that is function ofthe filling status of the queue. the relation between the probability and the queue status is definedby means of a SW configurable curve. If the queue is full, the new packet is discarded with proba-bility 1 (like in the Tail drop case).

• WRED: it is similar to RED, with the difference that for each queue two drop’s curves are defined.the packet in ingress is coloured according to MEF 10.2, i.e.e according to the CIR and EIR ingressfiltering policy defined. As a consequence, WRED can be chosen only if CIR/EIR Ingress filtering pol-icy is enabled for the ingress port. Once coloured, “red” packets are always discarded, while “green”and “Yellow” packets are managed according to different curves.

The traffic in the queues is then emptied by means of either Strict priority or Weighted Fair Queue algo-rithm. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With WFQ the available band-width is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in addition possible toconfigure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.

Going into details:

• Strict Priority: first, all the packets from the highest priority queue are transmitted, then all thepackets from the second queue, and so on.

• Weighted Fair Queueing (W.F.Q.): the packets are sent on the radio following a rule based on theweight assigned to each Queue.

Each queue “i” with WFQ is given a weight (importance) Wi.WFQ guarantees a minimum service rate to queue “i”

Ri = R*Wi/(W1+W2+....+Wn) [Rate of the queue i]

Where:R = rate of the servant (capacity available on the MW link)W i= weight of the Queue taken in considerationWn = weight of the last Queue with WFQ enabled

This means that the rate of the queue is a fraction of the total bandwidth that dependson the weight assigned to the Queue.

For example if the weights are set as Fig.16.

MN.00273.E - 005 65

Fig.16 -

Means that the Serving Priority of the frames present in the queues will be:

• the packets present in the Queue 7 will be transmitted with a Race 8/35

• the packets present in the Queue 6 will be transmitted with a race 8/35

• ......

• the packets present in the Queue 0 will be transmitted with a rate 1/35.

7.4 CONGESTION AVOIDANCE

The Congestion Avoidance is a method that permits to discard some frames before congestion occurs.When the queue is full there is a congestion situation, this means that the resources are not enough toserve all the packets and there is not enough room in the queue for more storage. In this case some packetmust be dropped. The choice of the dropping policy has different effects on the network. In case of con-gestion, the TCP/IP protocol reduces the transmitting windows and therefore the amount of traffic trans-mitted. The TCP/IP protocol increases the transmitting window very slowly to allow the network to solvethe congestion issues.

This means that, when congestion occurs, some selective dropping has to be done.

There are different policies of dropping that can be adopted:

• Tail: in this case the last packets that come to the full queue are dropped (default configuration)

• Queue: in this case all the queue is emptied, i.e. all the packets present in the Queue are dropped

• Red: Random Early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming packets aredropped randomly regardless if the frames are marked yellow or green (for more details on yellowor green frames please refer to the paragraph 7.3.2 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according toMEF 10.2))

• WRed: Weighted Random early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incomingpackets are dropped randomly. First are dropped the packets coloured in yellow and then aredropped the packet coloured in green, see Fig.17.

66 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.17 - Red curve

Once WRed is enabled the threshold of Smin Smax and Pmax for the Green and Yellow frames have to be set.

The value set the points of the curve shown in Fig.17. There are some predetermined profiles to be ena-bled:

• Profile 1:

- Smin= 30

- Smax=60

- Pmax=10

• Profile 2:

- Smin= 20

- Smax=40

- Pmax=10

These profiles can be set for the Yellow Frames (Y) and Green Frames (G) as well. These values represent:

• Smin: represents the threshold after which the switch starts dropping packets

• Sman and Pmax: are the thresholds that makes the curve of “Drop Percentage”/”Average Queue Oc-cupation” change. After this point the dropping packets increase rapidly.

• “Red Gentle”: after the point represented by Smax and Pmax: the Drop percentage can increase toa 100% (RED) or can linearly increase. the choice of how to increase, directly or linearly to a 100%is manage by disabling or enabling the RED Gentle.

• RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reachesSmin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

• RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packetsare dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 andSmax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of ran-domly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;

• WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy(Lan1,2,3,4);no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green); no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are

MN.00273.E - 005 67

dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/Pmax(G);with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets aredropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y);all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G); all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);

• WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line forYellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy(Lan1,2,3,4); for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets aredropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/Pmax(G);with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packetsis defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%; for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets aredropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y);with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packetsis defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;

WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the“stop and go” behaviour (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.

Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.

Ethernet Frame Fragmentation

QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving it precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case ofreal time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speedand usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the max-imum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends onthe traffic conditions.

In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priorityqueue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmis-sion (even a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change dependingon the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). Onetechnique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided insmaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rxside the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waitingtime for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sen-sitive benefits to the packet jitter.

The SIAE switch allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.

For example: in case the radio is serving a 1024Byte frame in the lowest (queue 0) and there is an incomingframe (256 bytes) in the highest priority queue (queue 7). The packet in the highest priority should beserved first, but since the servant is busy processing the packet in the lower queues, the 256Byte framehas to wait until the radio has processed the 1024 Byte frame, see Fig.18.

68 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.18 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled

With the fragmentation enabled the time that the packet in higher queues have to wait is smaller. Withfragmentation enabled the radio divides the 1024 byte packet into 4 packets of 256 Bytes and the servantcan transmit the first frame of 256 Byte in the lower queue and then transmit the high priority traffic, re-ducing the jitter in the network, see Fig.19.

Fig.19 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled

Enhanced VLAN Management

The SIAE switch provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:

• VLAN rewriting

• Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

MN.00273.E - 005 69

VLAN rewriting

VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packetreceived (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.

On uplink side (packets received on LAN interface by the switch and sent to the radio) the VID can be re-written on the basis of the following criteria:

- LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basisof its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.

- LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configuredon the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.

On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + C-VID + priority criteria.

On downlink side (packets received on radio side and sent by the switch on the LAN interface):

• the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the received packet. I.e., new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of its original C_VID. It is possibleto configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink configuration.

• C-VID can be removed selectively. It is possible to select the C-VID, enable the option “Removed”and select the Output interface. In other words on downlink side it is possible to select the C-VIDto be remove and the correspondent Output LAN.

Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority

VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packetsmust cross networks managed by different entities.

The SIAE switch radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to adda new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:

- Ingress port of the packet

- C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port

The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to stand-ard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.

Packet Compression

The SIAE switch provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet headerby transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.

Multi-layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6, UDP and RTPand LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1 interface,where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. The Header compressed inthis case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE traffic insertedinto the tunnel).

When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maxi-mum limits:

• the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes

• the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is re-quired by SIAE switch in order to perform the compression task.

In Fig.20 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of headerfield size and header field size after internal coding.

70 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.20 - Header compression

Header field size (Bytes)

Header field size after

internal coding (Bytes)

� Ethernet

� C-TAG (802.1Q)

� Q-in-Q (802.1ad)

(default=1)

� MPLS

Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included (default=1)

� Control Word (RFC4385)

� IP+

� UDP

� RTP

Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)

IPv4 only (default)

IPv4 or IPv6

Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2)

+14 +12.5

+4 +2

- -

+(4*n) +(2*n)

- -

+(4*n) +(4*n)

+4 +3.5

- -

+20 +19.5

+40 +39.5

+8 +8

+12 +12

+100 +99

MN.00273.E - 005 71

7.5 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTE-NANCE)

This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and mon-itor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

7.5.1 Service layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards coverthis topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.

The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarmmessage.

SIAE equipment support CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.

The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provide the tools to monitor the Ether-net Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application caninclude many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.

The Standards define:

• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domainis the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other Enduser), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domainsshould have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the EndUsers. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower thanService Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values foroperator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Main-tenance Domains.

• ALFOplus: in SIAE equipment one Maintenance Domain can be specified. At each end of the Main-tenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are “markers” thatdefine the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also MIPs(Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The MEPsand MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the domain andthe Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attenuation must be paid to use the sameMD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same value ofMD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.

72 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.21 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains

• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in whichthe MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.

• ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN toa Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the MaintenanceAssociation, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In eachSIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to usethe same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the sameVLAN correspond to different MA associations.

• At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctlymonitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer topollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and willdiscard OAM messages generated from lower domains.

• ALFOplus: Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Oncechosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-

Customer

ServiceProvider

Operator 1

Operator 2

AccessNetwork

Operator 1Core Network

AccessNetwork

MEP

CE PE CEPEOperator 2

Core Network

MEP

MEP MIP MIP MEP

MEP

MEP

MEP MEPMIP MIP

High Level

Low Level

MN.00273.E - 005 73

ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP “ ” and MEP “ ”. With MEP “ ” configured the OAMPDUs are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sentfrom the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP “ ” configured the OAM PDUsare sent from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table pre-viously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs be-longing to same MA must have different MEP IDs. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to behabilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are listedhereafter:

• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeatmessage) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-tual connection. this message can only be originated by a MEP.

ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automaticreply from the destination entity.

• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sendsa Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the messageand the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from oneMEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.

ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in SIAE equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consec-utive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPsin the same MA. This is done through the “Remote MEP” application which allows this acknowledge-ment and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

• Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC address. Inthis way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sendsthe Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. the MIPsthat are deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the initiatingMEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices deployedin the path and their order.

• Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDIto inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantagesof this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to checkthe status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.

ALFOplus: this feature is present in SIAE equipment and the presence of this alarm can be checkedas well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

7.6 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON

RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.

SIAE equipment support RMONv1, first MIB, as defined in RFC2819. This MIB contains real-time LAN sta-tistics e.g. utilization, collisions and CRC errors. These counters are managed locally into the radio equip-ment and are defined independently for each port of the device (both LAN and Radio interfaces). SIAENMS systems collect periodically this data and store it into the network database. More in details, the RMONimplementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:

• RMON – Statistics: These are the counters data collected in real time by the Network Equipment.These data are stored in the network equipment itself and, the NMS Statistics viewer can visualizethis data with the “Refresh” button.

• RMON - History: This is managed by the NMS through the collection of the counters data from theNetwork Equipment. After a periodical polling to the Network Element, the NMS collects all the dataand these data are seen as the RMON History.

74 MN.00273.E - 005

In other words, the “RMON Statistics” are the data that are collected and stored in the Network Equipment,while the “RMON History” is an aggregation of the data collected from each network equipment and thedatabase is located in the NMS.

7.7 RMON COUNTERS

RMON statistics are composed by counters for each port of the device that are stored in the equipmentdeployed on field.

Into the equipment it can be chosen to store the values with a sampling period that can be defined betweentwo values: 1 min, 15 min, or both. For each sampling period the counters values are stored into the equip-ment. After a predefined period (polling period), all the RMON data stored by the equipment are get by theNMS. The polling period can be either less than 4 hours (if the sampling period is 1 min) or 1 day (in casethe sampling period is 15 min). The NMS aggregates the files received to create a bigger database withthe History of the Performance Monitoring samples.

Here below are described the RMON counters available for each device interface (both LAN and radioports):

• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames, or whole queue contents) in which packets weredropped by the interface due to lack of resources.

• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)received.

• BroadcastPkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast ad-dress.

• Multicast Pkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

• CRC Align Errors: Total number of packets received that had a length between 64 and the Max Pack-et Size configured on the equipment switch (in any case not exceeding 10240 bytes) with bad FrameCheck Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-gral number of octets (Alignment Error).

• Undersize Pkts: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were oth-erwise well formed.

• Oversize Pkts: The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer thanmaximum allowable length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwisewell formed.

• Fragments: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had eithera bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS witha nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).

• Jabbers: Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, itcan be set to 1522, 2048 bytes or 10240 Kbytes) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Se-quence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral numberof octets (Alignment Error).

• Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.

• Utilization Rx: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/s port speed. So, it represents the mean RX throughput measured on the port during the samplingperiod and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.

• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

• BroadcastPkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to the broadcastaddress.

• Multicast Pkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to a multicast ad-dress.

MN.00273.E - 005 75

• Utilization TX: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/s port speed. So, it represents the mean TX throughput measured on the port during the samplingperiod and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.

All the counters described above are part of the RMON statistics and it is not possible to collect only a sub-set of them. It is however possible to select on which equipment interface activate the RMON statistics (forexample, they can be enabled only on the radio interface). This allows reducing the total amount of PMdata, for example avoiding data collection from unused LAN interfaces. This can be done on all PayloadInterfaces (regardless if electrical or optical), the Radio interfaces are included as well.

7.8 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRI-ORITY COUNTERS

In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port with SIAE equipment it is possible to set on the Radio interfacethe RMON counters per Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters,the Service and Priority counters can be activated for the following variables.

• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)received.

• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface dueto lack of resources.

The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipmentand configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Countersbut not the Service and Priority RMON.

In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted through Web LCT. Thismeans that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of theseRMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet Counters.It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.

7.8.1 Priority RMON

The Priority RMON are based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority; thisimplies that:

• the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number ofthe queues available in SIAE switch.

• if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same Queue, the Priority RMON will work with oneProbe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as “Same Priority Traffic” and thePriority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue

In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in SIAE switch). Each probecounts the variables listed above (Octets TX, Pkts TX, Octets RX, Pkts RX and DropEvents).

These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

76 MN.00273.E - 005

7.8.2 Service RMON

The Service RMON counters allow the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Ser-vice (Vlan Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.

Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag.

These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

7.9 SYNCHRONISM

Network Synchronisation is a growing subject related to the network evolution from TDM to Ethernet pay-load.

In this chapter it will be described the different features supported by SIAE switch equipment for the syn-chronization transport. The decision of the correct source to enable and how to pass the synchronisationsignal to customer’s equipment depends on network situation which has to be evaluated case by case.

Fig.22 - NodeB and BTS synch

The main concept is to transfer the synchronization signal throughout the network deployed. This impliesthat SIAE equipment will take the clock signal from the concentration points (POC) and transfer it towardsthe tail sites and distribute the synchronization signal to the external equipment such as NodeBs and BTS(see Fig.22).

Fig.23 - SETS circuit

Going into details, this means that each SIAE equipment (represented in Fig.23) will have, at least, one“Input” and one “Output” CK.

Input (CK IN) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment get the Clock signal from, these could beanother SIAE equipment or external equipment.

Output (CK OUT) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment provides the Clock Signal to, these couldbe another SIAE equipment or external equipment.

ETH

ALFOplus

E1 TDM

ReferenceClock

SyncSync

Sync

Sync2G BTS

3G NodeBFull IP

Syn

c

ETH

E1 TDM

Ethernet/TDMNetwork

Sync

ALFOplus

ALFOplusSETSInput

CK INOutput

CK OUT

MN.00273.E - 005 77

Internally to each SIAE equipment the SETS identify the input and output types of interfaces by the fol-lowing codes:

• TE: This code represents an Ethernet interface (LAN) used as input CK

• T0: Output interface. This code represents the Internal Clock

The purpose of the above list is to list the different acronyms used by the SETS that may be present in theconfiguration screens.

When the Synchronization is enabled in SIAE MW equipment, in the configuration screen, there are somefeatures to be used for maintenance or refined tuning of the clock propagation.

Fig.24 - Synchronisation menu

Here below are listed the different configurations to be made:

• Status Control: this is a forced status for maintenance purposes of the SETS. It can be forced in:

- “Free Running”: Independently from the synchronization signal received, the clock is locked ontothe internal clock.

- “Hold Over”: The SETS is locked into the internal clock which tries to preserve the frequencyreceived when the SETS was locked.

- “Locked”: in this case the SETS is locked to a source of synchronization.

• “Time” Settings: these are general setting for the synchronization

- “Hold Off Time”: Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequen-cy of a synchronism source become invalid (not present or degraded). At the end of the HoldOff time, the invalid source will be rejected and the first input source having a valid signal willbe used.

- “WTR Time”: i.e. Wait-To-Restore, this is a wait time to avoid oscillations. Time (expressed inminutes) that has to pass before allowing the selected valid input source to be actually usedwithin the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.

• “LTI Set Time” and “LTI Reset Time”: are controls that avoid oscillations of Alarms. When one alarmraises up, it has to be active for at least the “LTI Set Time” and when it disappears it has to be offfor at least “LTI Reset Time”.

• “Enabled”: Enables the SSM in the equipment

78 MN.00273.E - 005

7.10 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM

SIAE equipment is able to select among different sources of synchronization. A priority has to be assignedto enable each source, with a value ranging from 1 to 9 included. The priority 1 corresponds to the maxi-mum value, while the priority 9 corresponds to the minimum value. The priority shall be used to select inwhich order the different synch sources must be used. In case the Priority is set as “Disabled” the corre-spondent interface is not used as a synchronization source.

Fig.25 - Sources of synchronisation

The selectable sources of synchronisation are listed below. For each source it is also listed in square brack-ets the correspondent acronym used by the SETS:

• Radio Interface: it is possible to have 1 radio interfaces (1+0).

• GE Interface [TE]: to identify which LANs are the sources of synchronization they have to be chosenunder “TE LAN A” and “TE LAN B”. This implies that a maximum of 2 LAN interfaces can be set assource of synchronization. The AGS-H reference clock can be received on any one the 4 LAN inter-faces, independently from the fact they are electrical or optical. In order to receive the synchroni-zation signal (and regardless of the SSM status) the GE interface has to be set as “Slave”. Theconfiguration choices and other details are explained in “SSM on Ethernet Interfaces”.

• Internal Clock [T0]: with the Synchronization not enabled the equipment is locked into its internalclock

In case SSM is not enabled, the equipment switches from one source of synchronization to another follow-ing the priority scale, starting from the source set to priority 1 and scaling to the sources with higher valuesof priority (i.e. lower priority level). The synch source switch occurs when the present source suffers oneof the following events:

• The source of synchronization is not physically available

• The clock deviation is bigger than 4.6 ppm (maximum deviation that the internal clock can follow).

In other words, if the LAN1 is selected as first source (priority 1) of synchronization, and the LAN2 is se-lected as the second source (priority 2) of synchronization, the SIAE equipment will be synchronized onthe LAN1 until the cable will be physically unplugged or the LAN1 frequency and phase will be out of theirspecified ranges. Once one of these events occurs, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchro-nization to the second source listed. If the second source listed is unplugged or out of maximum range thenthe SIAE equipment will switch to the third source and so on. In case no other synch sources are available the SIAE equipment will go on “Internal Source”, i.e. the in-ternal clock present in SIAE equipment. In this condition the internal clock will be kept in hold status, tryingto keep the last synchronization reference received. In these conditions, the internal clock of SIAE equip-

MN.00273.E - 005 79

ment has a reliability of 0.3 ppm over 24 h. When the SIAE equipment switches to internal clock, it prop-agates a quality of SEC – SDH Equipment Clock.

7.11 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Once the SIAE equipment is synchronized, the clock signal has to be passed toward external equipment orother SIAE equipment. SIAE equipment can give the synchronization signal through different interfaces.

Fig.26 - Provide synchronism

The interfaces that are available to provide synchronization to other SIAE or external equipment are:

• Radio: this interface is passing the synchronism automatically to the remote equipment. No config-uration is needed.

• GE Interfaces: the TX CK of the all GE lines (i.e. LAN 1 and 2) is locked to the SETS. In this way,the CK can be passed through these connections to other equipment provided that they supportSynchronous Ethernet. The GE Interfaces when used in Electrical can provide the CK signal to otherequipment: in this case the equipment port role must be “Master”. Once the synchronization is en-abled in the SIAE equipment, automatically all the LAN interfaces are locked onto the SETS. Thisimplies that the synchronization signal is automatically provided onto all the LAN interfaces.

The choices of the interface to pass the clock signal depend strictly on the external equipment. This meansthat in first place it is necessary to establish the possible sources of synchronization available on the ex-ternal equipment. Depending on the availability of these sources, SIAE equipment will be configured withthe correspondent interface to pass the clock signal.

80 MN.00273.E - 005

7.12 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE

The SSM is a protocol that transmits the quality of the synchronization message throughout the network(G.781).

In the synchronization network the transmission of the quality of the clock allows the network to be scal-able and to provide redundancy. In case of failure of SIAE equipment or cable, it is helpful to provide re-dundancy for clock propagation in order to avoid synchronization loops.

Synchronisation loops could happen after a failure when two equipment are synchronising each other onthe same physical connection. If this happens the equipment will not present any alarm on the synchroni-zation but will generate and propagate a not reliable clock. The quality of the clocks that are propagatedare:

• PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)

• SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

• SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

• SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)

• DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock

Here above are listed in order from the better quality clock (PRC – Primary Reference Clock) to the worsequality clock (DNU – Do Not Use). The better the quality is the more time can the SIAE equipment stay inholdover (Internal Clock) without a degradation of the payload. In other words, better is the quality, longercan remain reliable the clock in holdover cases.

The DNU quality is always propagated on the source on which the equipment is locked for synchronization.In this way the Loops of synchronization are easily avoided.

Unless the user forces the CK quality input/output, SIAE equipment reads the quality present in the inputinterfaces. This means that, unless there is some user’s modifications, SIAE equipment propagates thequality of the clock as it is. I.e. the output quality is the same as the input quality.

E.g.: If in the input interface (POC Site) there is a quality of SSUT of the CK signal, SIAE equipment willpass throughout the network this synchronization signal with a quality message of SSUT.

In case the SIAE equipment is in Holdover (internal clock) it changes the quality of the synchronization to“SEC” quality. With SSM enabled, SIAE equipment will choose the sources of the synchronization based onthe better quality received.

In general, the equipment selects the synch source with the following criteria:

• it chooses the sources with the highest quality

• if more than one source have the same quality, the one with the highest priority is selected (i.e. theones that have the smaller priority value, from 1 up to 9)

• in any case, if a DNU quality is received on the highest priority source, this latter is discarded andthe equipment selects an alternative source.

Example 1: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same priority:

a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)

b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 1)In case the sources have the same priority, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchroniza-tion to the best quality, in this case (b) the Radio with SSUT quality.

Example 2: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the different qual-ity and different priority:

a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)

b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 2)In case the sources have different priority and quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source ofsynchronization with higher quality, in this case (b) the Radio with Priority 2 and quality SSUT. Howev-er, if a DNU quality would be received on Radio, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source toLAN1 interface.

Example 3: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same quality:

a. LAN1 with quality SSUT (Priority 1)

MN.00273.E - 005 81

b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 2)In case the sources have equal quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronizationwith higher priority, in this case (a) the LAN1 with Priority 1 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU qualitywould be received on LAN1, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to Radio port.

The quality of the synchronism has to be enabled for each SIAE equipment and can be transported on thefollowing interfaces:

• On the Ethernet Interfaces through a standard protocol (according to ITU-T G.8264)

• Radio interface with Local/Remote Telemetry: Depending on the MW link configuration (1+0) theSSM messages are passed to the remote SIAE equipment in different ways.

- 1+0 Configuration: In this case there is one Local/Remote Telemetry passing the SSM messages

Within this configuration table there are also some maintenance configurations such as:

• Forced Switch: this command allows the operator to force the SETS to lock to a predeterminedsource. This command is above all other configurations. This means that the SETS will be lockedonto this source even if the cable is unplugged

• Preferential switch: In case two sources have equal priority it is possible to set a Preferential Source.In any case the quality is the main parameter of choice, then when two sources have the same pri-ority, the preferential source is chosen.

In relation to the SSM, it is possible to:

• Visualize the quality of the clock signal received and transmitted (Rx Quality and Tx Quality)

• Overwrite the Quality received or transmitted (Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Quality) and the choicesare:

- PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)

- SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

- SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

- SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)

- DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock

The Overwrite of the Quality of the Clock is configurable by the user and simply forces in input or outputthe quality.

7.12.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces

In order to propagate the clock signal through the Ethernet 1GE Electrical interface it is necessary to setcorrectly the master and slave option for each interface. It is possible to assign the roles (Master or Slave)statically (as set up for source LAN) or dynamically (according to Synch direction).

This because the Master interface transmits the clock to the Slave interface and in case the direction ofpropagation of the clock has to be changed (line failure, insufficient quality, etc..), the master and slaveassignment has to be re-negotiated with a consequent loss of traffic. This re-negotiation implies an inter-ruption of the traffic from 2.4 to 2.6 seconds.

SIAE equipment allows to set the role of the interfaces to “According to synch direction” (dynamic), theflow of the propagation of the clock signal is automatically changed depending on the transferring directionof the CK.

If the role of the interfaces is set to “As set up for source LAN” (Static), the flow of the propagation of theclock signal is fixed (see Fig.27).

Fig.27 - LAN synchronisation method

82 MN.00273.E - 005

The other configuration present in SIAE equipment that manage the role of the LAN interfaces (Master/Slave) is present in the main configuration of each LAN interface. Regardless if each LAN interface is setmanually as Master/Slave or with autonegotiation, the setting of dynamic or static in the SSM configurationis privileged. In other words if the Master/Slave are set manually in the interface configuration and in theSSM is set “According to synch direction”, if needed, the role of the LAN changes according to synch direc-tions.

When an electrical GE interface is in Master State (despite from the fact that it comes from a “static” or“dynamic” setting) every synchronization signal that is coming from this interface has automatically thequality of DNU. This does not occur for optical GE or FE interfaces (Electrical and Optical), where the “Mas-ter” and “Slave” roles are not foreseen and so the transmitting direction for the clock can be exchangedwithout any port role re-negotiation.

All the Ethernet interfaces are locked on the SETS, regardless which LAN interfaces are set as sources ofsynchronization. Nevertheless the “Overwrite RX Quality” and “Overwrite TX Quality” can be applied onlyon the LAN interfaces used as sources of synchronization.

MN.00273.E - 005 83

Section 3.INSTALLATION

8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS

8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-TION

The installation, maintenance or removal of antenna systems require qualified experienced personnel.SIAE installation instructions have been written for such a personnel. Antenna system should be inspectedonce a year by qualified personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.

SIAE disclaims any liability or responsibility for the results of improper or unsafe installation practices.

ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency bandrefer to the label on the equipment.

The system is provided with an integrated antenna.

Warning This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Warning Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at thefrequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.

Warning The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regula-tion for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.

Warning The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate col-lection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For moreinformation, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

84 MN.00273.E - 005

8.2 GENERAL

The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield.

Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:

• during the design phase

- use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers

- use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supplywires

• during the installation phase

- use of shielded cables

- use of ground connections.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs and it must be doneonly by service person suitably trained.

Warning Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs, chosen for local and remote side, haveequal subband and different Tx module (H and L).

8.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to theelectromagnetic compatibility standards.

The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors onthe equipment front.

Position and pin-out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.

8.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, protect the ODU by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equip-ment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one’s country.

The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the auxiliary connector M12P5 from theODU or disconnecting the LAN PoE cable.

The typical magneto thermal switch has characteristics at least 48Vdc @1.5A with overcurrent relay class“C” or “K” tripping curve.

Seal the auxiliary power connector when the radio is powered via PoE, in order to avoid the removal of thecover without tools.

MN.00273.E - 005 85

8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.28 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making ref-erence to Fig.39.

Legend

1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq.mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.

2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16sq. mm (V42025)

3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable.

4. Grounding cable kit (ICD00072F) copper cable type or copper alloy to connect the shield of inter-connection cable.

5. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.

6. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cablemust be 16 sq. mm

Fig.28 - Grounding connection

8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (univer-sal - no tools)

Follow the procedure. See Tab.20.

IDUunit

ODUunit

2

5(+) (-)

4

Localground

rackground

Indoor

Stationground

6

1

3 4 3

86 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions

Description

Remove the cable jacket by 30mm width approximate-ly. Take care not to damage the copper conductor. Cleanand dry the application area.

Remove the protective film from the butyle sealingpaste.Put the contact in position on the cable, by firmly press-ing on the cable jacket, checking the adherence of thebutyle sealing paste. The contact is firmly positioned onthe cable jacket.

Wrap the copper mesh around the contact and outerconductor (at least 4 revolutions). Block the mesh terminal under the contact tooth. Cut the exceeding mesh length.

Remove the self-agglomerating tape protective film.Carefully wrap tight the tape around contact and cable,following the suitable mean line.Tape adheres remaining in position and progressivelyself-agglomerates.

Connect the earthing cable.

MN.00273.E - 005 87

8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.

8.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• According to antenna polarization (vertical or horizontal), assemble the antenna and support brack-et.

Warning: These instructions are fully detailed in a separate manual “Antennas - Code: MN.00249.E”depending on the type of used antenna.

• Installation of the ODU

• Installation onto the pole of the supporting bracket

• ODU grounding.

8.7.1 Standard coupling kit

The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.

Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.39 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU. Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the fournut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four screws.

8.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRAT-ED ANTENNA

8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Centring ring and relevant screws

• M10 bolts

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

88 MN.00273.E - 005

8.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna boxprovided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on re-quested polarization.

After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.40.

• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on thecircular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange

• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)

• Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened tohave the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)

• It is recommended to apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 (not supplied) to the O-ring,protecting fingers with gloves, and insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to matchthe polarization of the antenna feeder:

- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach theODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between thefour bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,torque=46Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit (AAAL00033) - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to theODU handle by means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.

Warning Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure water-proof IPx5.

MN.00273.E - 005 89

8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARAT-ED ANTENNA

• Diameter of the pole 60-114 mm

8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

• 1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

• M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna

See Fig.41.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =46Nm).

• Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.41 the antenna flange is shown in twodifferent positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the wave-guide must be installed.

• On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert inholes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each boltshould be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness ofhook (4), use 15mm spanner).

• It is recommended to apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 (not supplied) to the O-ring,protecting fingers with gloves, and insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to matchthe polarization of the antenna flange:

- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach theODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between thefour bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque=46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit (AAAL00033) - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to theODU handle by means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable

Warning: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure water-proof IPX5

90 MN.00273.E - 005

8.9.1.2 Waveguide towards the antenna

After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration, the waveguide towards the antenna must be installed.

• 1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. Incase of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.21 for details.

8.10 WAVEGUIDE BENDING

Tab.21 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Frequency

Bending radius with-out rebending

mm (inch)E-plane a

a. Bending E-plane

Bending radius with-out rebending

mm (inch)H-plane b

b. Bending H-plane

Bending radius with rebending mm (inch)E-plane a.

Bending radius with rebending mm (inch)H-plane b.

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

Rmin/EBending E-plane

(short side of the section)

Rmin/HBending H-plane

(long side of the section)

MN.00273.E - 005 91

8.11 ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION

In the following a list of materials to be used during installation.

Tab.22 - Accessories for installation

SIAE code Descriptions View

U00921a Fibre optical splitter distribution box for 1 ODU

U00922a. b Junction box IP66, for fallen of optical cable to connect 2 ODU

J23599 Amphenol wrench connector

M03148 9x360 nylon ties cable

ICD00072F Universal kit cable grounding

V60052 15...42GHz TR installation kit (Standard type)

92 MN.00273.E - 005

V42025 Grounding cable kit for ODU 1+0

AAAL00033 ODU solar shield (optional)

U00899 a. Optical box IP67150x250x46

a. Boxes don’t foresee replacement seals.

b. If the second ODU connection takes place much later than the first one, it is possible that the closingof U00922 box doesn’t guarantee the seal tightness.


MN.00273.E - 005 93

8.11.1 Installation procedure of optical box

Components

Fig.29 - Components

Recommended tools (not included)

Fig.30 - Recommended tools (not included)

94 MN.00273.E - 005

Installation

1. Open the cover by special key and screw off the middle plate

Fig.31

2. Take off the adapter panel, put it back after installing adapters

Fig.32

3. Fix PLC splitter, connect splitter ribbon fibres with output pigtails that coated loose tube, fix the ar-ranged output pigtails with loose tube to tray. Lead output pigtail to the other side of the tray andinsert adaptor.

MN.00273.E - 005 95

Fig.33

4. Remove the input entry holder and tension member, put stripped fibre through rubber ring and fix;then guide the fibres in sleeve to splice with input of splitter.

Fig.34

96 MN.00273.E - 005

5. Fibre connection, coiling and storage, fixing, suitable for 2mm (or 3mm) pigtail and drop cable.

Fig.35

6. Check and lock the door

MN.00273.E - 005 97

Fig.36

7. Installation:

- pole mounted, make pole band pass through bracket’s hole, fix the bracket to the pole by fas-tening pole band’s bolts

- wall mounted, mark the target point on the bracket to target point by nail or bolt.

Fig.37 - On pole

Fig.38 - Wall mounted

98 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.39 - ODU with standard coupling kit

O-ring

Coupling kit

MN.00273.E - 005 99

Fig.40 - 1+0 ODU installation

3

1

2

100 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.41 - 1+0 antenna flange

8.12 USER CONNECTORS

ALFOplus provides an auxiliary connector and 2 types of Amphenol connector, which guarantee Ethernetport compatibility for both version: Gigabit electrical and optical.

4

3

4

1

2

5

114-60

MN.00273.E - 005 101

8.12.1 Auxiliary connector

The auxiliary 5 pin circulator connector has various functions and it is used when:

• the Power over Ethernet injector through the data Lan cable is not available or as additional powersupply source

• during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable received signal strength indicator inEquipment menu - General preset RSSIIt is recommended after the alignment to set RSSI as Disable not to overload CPU

• In case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with serial console (F03594),as shown in Fig.60 using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button o access in the login.

The available auxiliary cables already assembled:

• F03594 cable for laboratory use only (see Fig.60)

• F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (remove it after commissioning pointing) (see Fig.61)

Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable


P04185 Female 5 pin M12 shielded connector

M10154 Outdoor power supply cable2x0.75mmq for distance 100m

M10166 Outdoor power supply cable2x1.5mmq for distance 200m

102 MN.00273.E - 005

Assembly steps for M12 male/female connector and conductor

a= slide on parts

b= strip conductor, widen shield and lay around the shielding ring, cuf off projecting mesh. Slide coresthrough the housing. mount shielding ring, gasket and clamping cage. Tighten pressure screw to fix thecable. Screw down cores. Mount male/female part. Tighten pressure screw.

Fig.42 - Functional drawing

Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector

Schematic diagram

Fig.44 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)

MN.00273.E - 005 103

Fig.45 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view

Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector

8.12.2 RJ45 connector

The electrical RJ45 connection to ALFOplus is guaranteed only with coded connector; do not use other mo-dalities of connectors.

Part to be assembled (see Tab.25)

Tab.25 - Part to be assembled

Pinout Description

1 Vdc (-) = -48 Volts

2 Vdc (+) = 0 Volts

3 Rx_Console & Vpointing (+)

4 Tx_Console

5 GND_Console & Vpointing (-)

Shield Ground

SIAE code Description View

P20032 Amphenol kit RJ45 shielded full out-door connector

M02472 Data cable CAT5e for outdoor

104 MN.00273.E - 005

1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet cables and connectors

Please be aware that modifying Ethernet cables improperly may cause loss of network connectivity. Pleasefollow colours of wiring.

Tab.26 - MDI(EIA/TIA T568A)

M05184 Indoor RJ45 boot protection black=6mm

P03192 Indoor RJ45 unshielded plug

P20051 Outdoor RJ45 shielded

Pin Colour code wire Asignment 1000Base-TX

1 WHT/GRN BI_DA+

2 GRN BI_DA-

3 WHT/ORG BI_DB+

4 BLU BI_DC+

5 WHT/BLU BI_DC-

6 ORG BI_DB-

7 WHT/BRN BI_DD+

8 BRN BI_DD-

SIAE code Description View

MN.00273.E - 005 105

Fig.46 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable

Fig.47 - RJ-45 Pinout

Fig.48 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly

LAN Cable connector - P20032 - Assembly procedure for RJ sealed connectors

Procedure to be used for terminating and assembling of Amphenol Connector Kit

106 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.49 - P20032 kit

Step 1

Feed CAT cable through boot and connector housing as shown below.

Warning: Care should be taken not to damage the rubber sealing gasket inside the rear of the connectorhousing.

Fig.50 - Boot connector

Step 2

Terminate RJ-45 connector onto CAT cable

Strip jacketing and shield as shown

MN.00273.E - 005 107

Warning It is mandatory to verify with Ethernet tester (not supplies) the proper connectivity of both ends,in order to avoid autonegotiation problems (as for example 1Gbps fullduplex not reached).

Fig.51 - Assembled Amphenol

Fold shield back onto jacketing. Wrap grain wireone and a half times around the shield. Trim ex-cess length from drain wire

Untwist pairs and arrange to desired order.Note: it is recommended to follow TIA-568 spec-ifications for wiring orientationTrim conductors at an angle and insert into theloading bar

Trim excess wire from holderInsert prepared cable into RJ-45 Plug

Bend strain relief to lay along cable

Crimp plug and strain relief

108 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.52 - Cable connector keys

Step 3

Insert terminated RJ-45 plug into connector housing.

While holding the connector body, pull cable through connector housing until RJ plus is near to the housing.Align the plug latch with the connector housing keyway.

Depress Plug latch and completely insert the RJ plug into the housing.

KEY ODU CONNECTOR

ALIGN THE KEYS AND

PUSH

MN.00273.E - 005 109

Fig.53 - Connector housing

Step 4

Attach and tighten sealing boot using a 19mm wrench.

Recommended tightening torque is 5.5 to 6.0 (in-lbs) or 0.62 to 0.68 (N-m)

Fig.54 - Connector tight

110 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.55 - PO0032

MN.00273.E - 005 111

Fig.56 - Connector positions

Warning: Tighten all unused connectors with the appropriate cover using the proper wrench J23599 (seeFig.57).

O K

N O

112 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.57 - Locking key for Amph. connectors - J23599

MN.00273.E - 005 113

Fig.58 - Assembled connectors

8.12.3 Optical connector

- Cable characteristics see Tab.27 and Fig.63, Fig.64, Fig.65

- Operating temperature range -40° C to +85°C

- Protection class IP67

P04185 (connector M12 female 5p shelded)

Outdoor LAN connector (LAN1-LAN2) P20032

Cable M10154 (Outdoor power supply cable 2x0.75mmq)

Tighten strongly LAN connectors by means of key to ensure the complete isola�on

114 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.27 - List of Amphenol optical cable

Connector End/End Length (m) Type Mode SIAE Code

SFP LC/LC 100 Single Mode P20046



SFP LC/LC 2.5 Single Mode P20053

SFP LC/OPEN END 2.5 Single Mode P20043

SFP LC/SFP LC 2.5 Single Mode P20047

SFP LC/LC 100 Multi Mode P20037






SFP LC/LC 2.5 Multi Mode P20052

SFP LC/OPEN END 2.5 Multi Mode P20034

SFP LC/SFP LC 2.5 Multi Mode P20038

MN.00273.E - 005 115

Fig.59 - IDU-ODU optical connection

Indo

or u

nit

Indo

or u

nitP200

52-J

UM

PER

LC/S

FP -L

C/LC

L=

2,5m

( m

ul�m

ode)

P200

53-J

UM

PER

LC/S

FP -L

C/LC

L=

2,5m

( si

ngle

mod

e)

U00

899

-U00

900

-U00

921

OPT

ICAL

BO

X

MU

LTI M

ODE

Siae

P/N

leng

thP2

0048

15 m

.P2

0035

25 m

.P2

0049

35 m

.P2

0036

50 m

.P2

0050

75 m

.P2

0037

100

m.

SIN

GLE

MO

DESi

ae P

/Nle

ngth

P200

5615

m.

P200

44

25 m

.P2

0057

35

m.

P200

45

50 m

.P2

0054

75

m.

P200

46

100

m.

P200

55

200

m.

F152

00-O

PT. J

UM

PER

SMLC

-LC

DU

P L=

15M

F152

01-O

PT. J

UM

PER

SMLC

-LC

DU

P L=

25M

F152

02-O

PT. J

UM

PER

SMLC

-LC

DU

P L=

50M

F152

03-O

PT. J

UM

PER

SMLC

-LC

DU

P L=

100M

F153

00-O

PT. J

UM

PER

MM

LC-L

C D

UP

L=15

MF1

5301

-OPT

. JU

MPE

R M

MLC

-LC

DU

P L=

25M

F153

02-O

PT. J

UM

PER

MM

LC-L

C D

UP

L=50

MF1

5303

-OPT

. JU

MPE

R M

MLC

-LC

DU

P L=

100M

M10

300

-OPT

ICAL

CAB

. 2 F

IBER

MM

50/1

25M

1030

1-O

PTIC

AL C

AB. 2

FIB

ER SM

9/12

5

AMPH

ENO

L O

PT. C

ABLE

116 MN.00273.E - 005

8.12.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure

Follow the instructions:

• plug the SFP module into LC embedded connectors until “Click” (see Fig.66 and Fig.67)

• pull lightly the SFP and check that it is locked to the connector (see Fig.68)

• insert plugged SFP on ALFOplus optical cage (see Fig.69)

• lock the connector by turning the nut (see Fig.70).

8.12.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure

Follow the instructions:

• unlock the connector by untightening the nut

• eject SFP module from ALFOplus Optical cage

• to unplug thr SFP from LC connector, push the locking by keeping a finger below the SFP module(see Fig.71).

Warning: don't insert the SFP module inside the housing of the ODU without the preliminary connectionbetween cable and the SFP as described in this paragraph.

MN.00273.E - 005 117

Fig.60 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only

WHI

TE/B

ROW

NW

HITE

/BRO

WN

4 BL

ACK

4 BL

ACK

2-1

2-1

2-2

2-2

2-4

2-4

2-3

2-3

FRO

MFR

OM

TOTOCO

URSE

COUR

SE

1-2

1-2

1-3

1-3

3-A1

3-A1

3-A3

3-A3

2-5

2-5

1-5

1-5

3-A2

3-A2

8 RE

D8

RED

ORA

NGE

ORA

NGE

COLO

URS

COLO

URS

WHI

TE/O

RANG

EW

HITE

/ORA

NGE

BLUE

BLUE

GREE

NGR

EEN

BRO

WN

BRO

WN

WHI

TE/B

LUE

WHI

TE/B

LUE

WHI

TE/G

REEN

WHI

TE/G

REEN

THER

MO

FIT

THER

MO

FIT

PIPE

PIPE

THER

MO

FIT

THER

MO

FIT

PIPE

PIPE

THER

MO

FIT

THER

MO

FIT

PIPE

PIPE

THER

MO

FIT

THER

MO

FIT

PIPE

PIPE

F035

94F0

3594

RED

RED

BLAC

KBL

ACK

8

3

6

2

1 4

7

V+V+V-V-

A1A1A2A2A3A3

118 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.61 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)

see

N.B

.se

e N

.B.

F --

---

F --

---

WIR

ES C

ON

NEC

TIO

N W

IRES

CO

NN

ECTI

ON

SID

E EN

LARG

ED V

IEW

SID

E EN

LARG

ED V

IEW

WIR

ES C

ON

NEC

TIO

N W

IRES

CO

NN

ECTI

ON

SID

E EN

LARG

ED V

IEW

SID

E EN

LARG

ED V

IEW

5

4

3

2

1

51

4

32

RED

RED

BLA

CK

BLA

CK

N.B

.2N

.B.2

N.B

.2N

.B.2

N.B

.1N

.B.1

N.B

.1 -

STR

IP T

HE

CABLE

RES

PECTI

NG

TH

E D

IMEN

SIO

N S

HO

W I

N T

HE

DRAW

ING

N.B

.1 -

STR

IP T

HE

CABLE

RES

PECTI

NG

TH

E D

IMEN

SIO

N S

HO

W I

N T

HE

DRAW

ING

N.B

.2 -

CABLE

HEA

T SH

RIN

KABLE

N.B

.2 -

CABLE

HEA

T SH

RIN

KABLE

WH

ITE/

BRO

WN

+ B

RO

WN

WH

ITE/

BRO

WN

+ B

RO

WN

WH

ITE/

ORAN

GE

+ O

RAN

GE

WH

ITE/

ORAN

GE

+ O

RAN

GE

WH

ITE/

BLU

EW

HIT

E/BLU

E

45

6

45

7

2

20,

6 m

m (

Blu

e)0,

6 m

m (

Blu

e)

06 m

m (

Gre

en)

06 m

m (

Gre

en)

*3 R

ED*3

RED

*2 B

LACK

*2 B

LACK

CF1

-4CF1

-4

CF1

-5CF1

-5

CO

URSE

CO

URSE

TOTOPa

rtPa

rtRef

.Ref

.FR

OM

FRO

MN

OTE

SN

OTE

S

BLU

EBLU

E

WH

ITE/

GREE

NW

HIT

E/G

REE

N

CM

2-1

CM

2-1

CM

2-2

CM

2-2

CM

2-3

CM

2-3

CM

2-4

CM

2-4

CF1

-1CF1

-1

CF1

-2CF1

-2

CF1

-3CF1

-3

CF1

-4CF1

-4

CF1

-5CF1

-5CM

2-5

CM

2-5

CM

2CM

2

1

CF1

CF1

CO

URSE

CO

URSE

TOTOPa

rtPa

rtRef

.Ref

.

*1*1

FRO

MFR

OM

CO

LOU

RS

CO

LOU

RS

N.B

. -

PART

MU

ST

BE

LABEL

LED

WIT

H H

OT

TIG

HTE

NIN

G R

ING

, D

ISPL

AYI

NG

:N

.B.

- PA

RT

MU

ST

BE

LABEL

LED

WIT

H H

OT

TIG

HTE

NIN

G R

ING

, D

ISPL

AYI

NG

: -

PART

NU

MBER

/REV

ISIO

N;

-

PART

NU

MBER

/REV

ISIO

N;

-

MAN

UFA

CTU

RER

ID

(REG

. M

ARK O

R I

NIT

IAL)

; -

MAN

UFA

CTU

RER

ID

(REG

. M

ARK O

R I

NIT

IAL)

; -

MAN

UFA

CTU

RIN

G D

ATE

(W

EEK/Y

EAR);

-

MAN

UFA

CTU

RIN

G D

ATE

(W

EEK/Y

EAR);

-

ELE

CTR

ICAL

TEST

PRO

VEN

("T

E" M

ARK).

-

ELE

CTR

ICAL

TEST

PRO

VEN

("T

E" M

ARK).

23

N.B

.1N

.B.1

6N

.B.2

N.B

.2

4

3535

4

6060

1530

1530

+20

+20

0 0 -

GET

VAL

UE

FRO

M L

AST

DIG

ITS

OF

PART

DES

CRIP

TIO

N -

GET

VAL

UE

FRO

M L

AST

DIG

ITS

OF

PART

DES

CRIP

TIO

N

MN.00273.E - 005 119

Fig.62 - ALFOplus connectors

Fig.63 - SFP LC/LC

Fig.64 - SFP LC/OPEN END

120 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.65 - SFP LC/ SFP LC

Fig.66 - LC connector

Fig.67 - SFP/LC connector locked

Fig.68 - SFP/LC connector check

MN.00273.E - 005 121

Fig.69 - SFP into ALFOplus

Fig.70 - Locked connection

122 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.71 - Unplug SFP

MN.00273.E - 005 123

Section 4.LINE-UP

9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS

9.1 GENERAL

The line-up consists of the following steps:

• switch on the equipment

• alarm leds check

• optimizing antenna orientation

• insertion into telecontrol and reachability of far-end terminal

• check of Ethernet connections

• quality evaluation with performance monitoring

Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please referto software manual.

9.2 SWITCH ON

Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:

• check external power supply voltage

• antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.

If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.

124 MN.00273.E - 005

9.3 ALARM LED CHECK

On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LEDdedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto the chapter“ALFOplus alarms and troubleshooting”.

9.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE

Connection between PC and ALFOplus can only occur if the IP address of the PC and the radio belong tothe same subnet and it can be made directly or through a switch on the LAN2 radio connector.

Using Subnetwork Craft Terminal (SCT):

1. press button “Options”, a window will open; select card “Connection”

2. select “Connect using local area network” (see Fig.72)

3. press “OK” and “Connect”.

Using WebLCT+ console (WLC):

1. add the IP address of radio in the LAN address book (see Fig.76)

2. press double click over the IP address to open the browser.

First connection (you know IP address)

1. with SCT or browser (internet explorer) type IP address stored previously (Factory Default are172.20.254.14/16 ODU L and 172.20.255.15/16 ODU H)

- Default User: SYSTEM

- Default Password: SIAEMICR

2. after connection it’s possible to modify IP address, etc.....

Rescue connection using SCT (you don’t know IP address)

1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.73) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network)ALFOplus rescue IP address: 172.20.253.13ALFOplus rescue subnetwork mask: 255.255.0.0

2. Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus with a LAN cable

3. By SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, type equipment user/passwordand press “RESCUE” button (see Fig.74)

4. Follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.75)

5. In “Rescue Connection” mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.

Rescue connection using WLC (you don’t know IP address)

1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.73) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network).ALFOplus rescue IP address: 172.20.253.13ALFOplus rescue Subnetwork Mask: 255.255.0.0


MN.00273.E - 005 125

3. By WLC, press the arrow down near the button connect and press “Rescue connection” (see Fig.76)

4. Type equipment user/password and follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.77)

5. In “Rescue connection” mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.

Rescue connection using “Command Prompt” (you don’t know IP address)

1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.73) to PC (the IP must belong to the rescue network)ALFOplus rescue IP address: 172.20.253.13AFOplus rescue Subnetwork Mask: 255.255.0.0


3. By command prompt, type “ping 172.20.253.13 -t” and press Enter.

4. Restart hardware ALFOplus

5. Wait till the ping reply, open Internet Explorer, type in the URL: 172.20.253.13 and press F5 untilthe login menu appears

6. In rescue connection mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.

Emergency connection (you don’t know IP address)

1. Connection between PC and ALFOplus with serial console cable (F03594) in auxiliary connector

2. using Hyperterminal - serial COM at 115200bps, 8bits, none parity, 1 stop bit, no flow control andpress “Enter” button to access in the login

3. after login will be shown the radio IP address

4. type “Config” if you want to change the boot parameters (IP address, etc...)

Fig.72 - Connection option

126 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.73 - IP address setting

Fig.74 - Login connection using SCT

MN.00273.E - 005 127

Fig.75 - Rescue login using SCT

Fig.76 - Web LCT console

128 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.77 - Rescue connection using WLC

9.5 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU (local and remote side) in some basic itemslisted in the following:

• modulation & capacity

• Tx frequency & power

• port configuration

• agent IP address and equipment ID

• store routing table

• remote element list

• restart equipment

Bandwidth and Modulation setting

See Fig.78.

Into WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

• Equipment - BW & MOD/LINK ID

• In Capacity and Modulation card, you can select Bandwidth&Modulation desired. Press Applyand Confirm

• Enable or disable ACM Engine, if you want dynamic modulation. Press Apply and Confirm

Warning: Use the same parameters on remote unit.

MN.00273.E - 005 129

Fig.78 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID

Tx frequency setting

See Fig.79. Into WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

• Radio Branch

• Settings card: in this card you have to select Duplex frequency and Tx frequency; Rx frequencyvalue is shown in the top status bar and is set automatically. Press Apply and Confirm.

Local Tx frequency must be set equal to remote Rx frequency. Please set the frequency according to yourlicense.

Warning: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs chosen for local and remote side haveequal sub-band and different Tx module (example of permissible pair ODU 1H and ODU 1L).

Tx power setting

See Fig.79. Into WebLCT at position:

• Equipment menu

• Radio Branch

• Powers card: in this card you have to set Tx power equal to radio planning value or if you do notknow it to maximum Tx power; in this card it is possible to enable automatic transmission powercontrol but it is important to set properly ATPC thresholds: Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max (see para-graph 7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction). Press Apply and Confirm.

Warning: Use the same parameters at remote ODU.

130 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.79 - Frequency and power setting

Port configuration setting

See Fig.80.


• Equipment menu

• Main - Port configuration

• In Ethernet card you can modify the IP address, netmask and supervisioning parameters. PressApply and Confirm. Press Store and Confirm.

Warning: Factory setting of the radio is LAO (Local Access Only). For remote radio management changeport settings in “Out of Band” or “Drop Node” or “In Band” on both sites.

Fig.80 - Port configuration

MN.00273.E - 005 131

Agent IP address setting

See Fig.81.


• Equipment menu

• Main - Equipment properties

• In General Info card, change the equipment ID and agent IP address equal to Ethernet IP ad-dress. Press Apply and Confirm.

Fig.81 - Equipment properties

Store routing table setting

See Fig.82.


• Equipment menu

• Main - Store routing table

• Type the default gateway IP address and select Lan Interface and/or add manually the routingcommand.

• Press Apply and Confirm. Press Save and Confirm.

Fig.82

132 MN.00273.E - 005

Remote element list setting

See Fig.83.

Into WebLCT at right position:

• Press the button to expand Remote Element List window

• Clear and Apply new list

• Add station, type “SIAE LINK” and press OK

• Select the station just created and add local element:

- IP address: type local radio IP address

- type of element: managed by SCTPress OK, Apply and Confirm.

• Add remote element:

- IP address: type remote radio IP address

- Type of element: Remote linkPress OK, Apply and Confirm.

Restart equipment

See Fig.83.


• Equipment menu

• Main - Equipment properties

• Press the button Restart Equipment and Confirm.

Fig.83 - Remote element list

MN.00273.E - 005 133

9.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT

When the whole radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimised. Antenna alignment optimization isperformed depending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local andremote S/N value maximizing them.

There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:

• through WebLCT interface

• through a voltmeter connected to Auxiliary connector on the ODU (F03608 cable - see Fig.61).

In order to get the Rx signal power level via software, connect the PC to ALFOplus (LAN2) and start thecommunication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT supervisory program.

Into WebLCT is shown in the top status bar (Rx1A=-value dBm) see Fig.83.

If you’re using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the auxiliary connector of ODU, themeasurement can be performed with a proper cable (see Fig.61).

Following this last procedure, the voltage you’re reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx powerlevel, refer to Tab.28.

Tab.28 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port

Typical Rx signal power level: -40dBm. It is the most important item to optimise the antenna alignment,but in a situation of interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but BER margin low. This meansthat when Rx fields will decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/WebLCT software looking at Signal Quality level.

Into WebLCT Software select:

• Equipment menu

• Maintenance

• S/N Meas. card (see Fig.85)

The S/N at nominal Rx level, read by means of WebLCT, must be 38dB @1024QAM (typical S/N: 39dB)(see Fig.85).

Received Signal (dBm) Signal Output (V) Error (dB)

-20 4.68 ±5

-30 3.51 ±5

-40 2.34 ±3

-50 1.17 ±3

-60 0 ±3

-70 -1.17 ±3

-80 -2.34 ±3

-90 -3.51 ±5

-100 -4.68 ±5

Formula RSSI=Offset + (Signal/Output)/Slope

Slope (V/dB) 0.117

Offset (dBm) -60

134 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.84 - Main menu with Rx signal power level

Fig.85 - S/N measurement monitoring

Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming po-sition:

- horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.86, only after having loosenthe nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.87.

- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.86only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.87 and (4) of Fig.86For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.87 and position it inhole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.87 and position it in hole (6). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) ofFig.87 and (4) of Fig.86.For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.87 and position it in hole(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.87 and position it in hole (5). Operate on verticaladjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.87and (4) of Fig.86.

For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0°starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),(2), (11) of Fig.87 and (4) of Fig.86 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.87for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.

- grounding The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.

MN.00273.E - 005 135

Fig.86 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment

12

34

5

136 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.87 - Antenna aiming block

9.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT

Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed via LAN2 or LAN1 ports depending on supervi-sioning parameters, once the radio link has been initialized correctly (Local&Remote). In SCT the window(see Fig.88) shows the network elements belonging to selected station. In the “login” column you cancheck the actual user profile of equipment (System=Administrator; Monitor=Read only) and check the lo-cal radio (Local) and the remote radio (Remote Link).

To change the User Profile, select the network element and press Login.

To connect to remote radio you can press double click in Remote Link Element or select Remote Link- Equipment - LCT interface.

In WebLCT software press button Open Far End button to open and manage the remote radio window. Ifthe remote link is not visible, it means that the Remote Element List is missing in the local ODU (in SCT-Tools - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard).

2

1 3

5

4

69

10

87

11

15 mm wrench32 Nm torque


15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque


MN.00273.E - 005 137

Fig.88 - Remote accessing

9.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC

9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability

Settings

To verify the Ethernet performances set the equipment following Tab.29

Tab.29 - Ethernet connection stability

Local Terminal Remote terminal

LAN1 LAN2 PORT A LAN1 LAN2 PORT A

Lan Setting

Rate Control Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable

Flow Control Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Master/Slave Master Master Master Master

M/S Autoneg. Disable Disable Disable Disable

MAC learning Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Speed/Duplex Auto (1Gbit) Auto (100Mbit) Auto (1Gbit) Auto

(100Mbit)

Cable crossover Auto Auto Auto Auto

138 MN.00273.E - 005

After checking commissioning measures it is mandatory to fill “SIAE commissioning report” and send it toSIAE database, ready to be checked when necessary.

These reports are very important for SIAE and for the customer because they certify the conformity of SIAElink.

Only in case you don’t have this document, the full backup file .bku can be generate using SCT.

For any technical problem contact help-desk office:

• email: [email protected]

• Tel. +39.02.27325452

9.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE

9.9.1 Scope

Scope of this paragraph is to provide a procedure that described, step by step, how to perform the softwareupgrade of ALFOplus equipment.

Downloading time depends on the connection used between PC and ALFOplus.

Warning: In order to transfer data “Web LCT console” or “Subnetwork Craft Terminal” running is necessary.

Virtu

al L

an (

802.

1Q)

Port

Bas

ed V

LAN LAN1 / Disable Enable / Disable Enable

LAN2 Disable / Enable Disable / Enable

Port A Enable Enable / Enable Enable /

802.1 Manage-ment Fallback Disable Fallback Fallback Disable Fallback

Default Vid 101 102 111 101 102 111

Priority 802.1PPort default

0

Port default

7

Port default

0

Port default

7

Ethe

rnet

Sw

itch

Max Packet size 2048 byte

Mac address aging time 300 sec

QinQ ETH Type 9100

Priority

Radio to LanNative 802.1p

Priority

LAN to radioNative 802.1p

Local Terminal Remote terminal

LAN1 LAN2 PORT A LAN1 LAN2 PORT A

MN.00273.E - 005 139

9.9.2 Procedure of firmware update

Follow the steps below to perform the software upgrade of ALFOplus equipment.

Boot download

1. Unzip files N10052-01 XXX.zip in a suitable directory of the PC used to perform the upgrade.

2. Connect to the equipment using the SCT or the WebLCT (login as “System”).

3. Open the Software Download window:

- using SCT, select Version from Equipment menu and press Download SW setup

- using WebLCT, select Software Info&Maint (see Fig.89) from Equipment menu and pressUpgrade (see Fig.90)

4. Select the file E82108.dwl (boot firmware) from the directory boot_e82108_xxyyzz.

5. Select Only difference or not present/peripheral as download mode.

6. Start the download and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up.

7. At the end of the boot firmware download, the equipment Controller will automatically restart. Waitfor the restart to be completed.

System version download

1. Unzip files N10052-01 XXX.zip in a suitable directory of the PC used to perform the upgrade.

2. Connect to the equipment using the SCT or the WebLCT (login as “System”).

3. Open the Software Download window:

- using SCT, select Version from Equipment menu and press Download SW setup

- using WebLCT, select Software Info&Maint (see Fig.89) from Equipment menu and pressUpgrade (see Fig.90)

4. Select the file N10052.dwl (system version) from the directory bin.

5. Select Forced as download mode.

6. Start the download and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up

7. At the end of the system version download, to activate the new system version a bench switch isrequired: click on Bench Switch and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up.Warning: the bench switch may be traffic affecting, depending on the system version previously run-ning.

WebLCT download

1. Unzip files Web_25_N96108_XXX.zip in a suitable directory of the PC used to perform the upgrade

2. Connect to the equipment using the WebLCT (login as “System”)

3. In Equipment menu - Software Info&Maint - WebLCT - Upload manager, press Browse andselect the file Web_25_N96108_xxyyzz.tar

4. Press Upload button and Confirm

5. After the upload it is recommended to clear temporary internet files, cookies and history of the usedbrowser.

140 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.89 - Software download procedure

Fig.90 - Upgrade software

9.10 BACKUP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSI-BILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS

9.10.1 Scope

This chapter describes the procedure to backup the full equipment configuration. This permits to recoverthe original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

Warning: In order to transfer data, WebLCT Console or Subnetwork Craft Terminal running is necessary.

MN.00273.E - 005 141

9.10.2 Backup/Restore Configuration using SCT

Backup Configuration

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:

1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizardwindow will be displayed.

2. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window willbe displayed.

3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).

4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.

5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.

6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the uploadwill appear the word done showing the procedure success.

7. Press OK to finish.

Restore Configuration

Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceedas follows:

1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard win-dow will be displayed.

2. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configura-tion Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.

3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download ConfigurationFile window will be displayed.

4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Completerestore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The worddone indicates that download has been successfully.

5. Press OK to finish.

Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

9.10.3 Backup/Restore Configuration using WEBLCT

Backup Configuration

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:

1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu

2. in the field Backup File name write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in thePC, complete with the full path of its folder

3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “Operation Status” field.

Restore Configuration

142 MN.00273.E - 005

Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceedas follow:

1. Select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu

2. In the field Restore file name write the name of the configuration file you are going to download inthe ODU, complete with the full path of its folder

3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “operation Status” field. DuringRestore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this config-uration at the end of the restore pushing Revert (see Fig.91)Warning: the file full backup, making use of SCT, isn’t compatible with WebLCT and vice versa.

Fig.91 - Backup/Restore configuration

MN.00273.E - 005 143

Section 5.MAINTENANCE

10 ALFOPLUS ALARMS AND LOOPS

10.1 GENERAL

A radio link generating alarm requires troubleshooting.

The troubleshooting of the ALFOplus can be organized on the basis of alarms.

Basic alarms come from LEDs on the equipment and all the active alarms can be observed through SCT/WebLCT.

In this document is present ALFOplus alarm list and a description of the loop facilities provided into theequipment.

10.2 ALARMS

Alarms can be pointed out through unit LEDs and/or through SCT/WebLCT software.

10.2.1 Alarm indications

There are two ways of processing the alarms:

• through LEDS

• through SCT/WebLCT

Alarm associated to ALFOplus can be classified in different groups. Names and composition of these groupsas well as association between alarm classes and relay contact can be defined by the customer.

Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regularoperation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:

144 MN.00273.E - 005

• Critical (red): out-of service, hw failure, urgent alarm

• Major (orange): loss of signal, minimum residual functionality, urgent alarm

• minor (yellow): failure neither urgent, high residual functionality, not urgent alarm

• warning (light blue): indication or wrong configuration, not urgent alarm

• none (green) no alarm or masked alarm.

Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to beserviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity.

Warning level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.

Alarm classification can be modified via SCT/WebLCT operator. A short description is given for each alarmin “Alarms” section with relevant class.

The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or red. The information provided are:

• Red light:

- ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting

- Flashing - An external alarm is active

• Green light:

- Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal

- ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active

• Orange light:

- During restart

During the power-up follows three status of display Led (see Tab.30)

Tab.30 - Bootstrap status display

10.2.2 SCT/WebLCT displayed alarms

All the alarms are displayed through SCT/WebLCT program running on a PC. Alarms are divided in groupsto refer to a particular functionality and are characterized by programmable severity.

Alarms, with group and a short description, are listed into Tab.31.

In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:

• COMMON – Failure or status relevant to whole equipment

• ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic

• P.M. ACM - Performance monitoring on ACM

• P.M. G.828 – Performance monitoring on signal quality

• P.M. Rx Power – Performance monitoring on received signal

• P.M. Tx Power – Performance monitoring on transmitted signal

• Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device

• RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of Radio

• SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status

Led 1st step - boot strap 2nd step - Loading We-bLCT

3rd step - Ready to management

Green OFF OFF OFF/BLINKING

Red OFF ON OFF/BLINKING

Orange ON OFF OFF

MN.00273.E - 005 145

• SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)

• Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm

Tab.31 - Alarms

Group WebLCT name Description

COMMON

Equip Rmon Alarm Statistic Counter Ethernet

Equip Manual Operation At least one manual operation on

OAM FM Fail Alarm MEP not receiving

OAM FM MEP Configuration Mismatch Alarm MEP not configured properly

ETH LAN

Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down Link aggregation not working

Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configura-tion Fault

Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration failed

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding Link loss in remote port

Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation Autonegotiation failed

Eth Lan Phy Sync Synchronization not aligned

Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Loss of Ethernet signal

P.M. ACMpm ACM - 24H Alarm

ACM measurements on received radio signalpm ACM - 15m Alarm

P.M. G.828

pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm

Quality measurements on radio signal re-ceived a

pm G828 - 15m SepAlarm

pm G828 - UAS Alarm

pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm

pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm

pm G828 - 15m Ses Alarm

pm G828 - 15m ES Alarm

P.M. Rx Powerpm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm Rx Power measurements on radio signal re-

ceived a.pm RxPwr - 15m Rlts Alarm

P.M. Tx Powerpm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm Tx Power measurements on radio signal

transmitted a.pm TxPwr - 15m Rlts Alarm

Plug-in module

Plug-in Los Alarm Loss of Signal on Module

Plug-in Module Alarm SFP module is missing

Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm Wrong SFP module

Plug-in Status Change SFP module is active

146 MN.00273.E - 005

RADIO

Radio Config Mismatch Set Mod/Cap mismatch on radio link

Radio Rx Quality Low Warning Received signal quality degraded

Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm Insufficient received signal quality

Radio Rx AGC Fail Automatic gain Control alarmed

Radio Rt Vco Fail Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure

Radio Tx Power Alarm Transmitted power below the fixed threshold

Radio Rx Power Low Alarm Received power below the fixed threshold

Radio Modulation Fail Alarm Alarm on radio transmitting side

Radio Demodulation Fail Alarm Alarm on radio receiving side

Radio Rx Alarm Set Low received power on radio

Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set Wrong frequency on radio link

Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss Alarm Bit error rate/Syncloss on received radio sig-nal

Radio Equip Reduced Capacity Alarm Capacity is reduced respect to the one with reference modulation

Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm Telemetry failed to radio link missing

Radio Equip Link ID Alarm Wrong Link ID received

SETS

Timing Sync Active Status Timing Sync is active

Timing Sync Drift Alarm Selected Synch bad quality

Timing Sync Los Alarm Selected Synch missing

Timing Generator Holdover Status Equipment in holdover status

Timing Generator Free Running Sta-tus Equipment in Free Running status

Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm T0 synch missing

SNTP Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost Server is missing

Unit

Unit SW Mismatch Alarm SW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit HW Mismatch Alarm HW mismatch detected on the unit

Unit Not Responding Alarm No response from the unit

Unit Missing Alarm Missing condition on the unit

Unit Fail Alarm Failure on the unit

a. Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.

MN.00273.E - 005 147

11 ALFOPLUS MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOT-ING

11.1 GENERAL

In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.

When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify thefailure unit to replace it with a spare one.

11.2 MAINTENANCE

Maintenance consists of two stages:

1. periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT

2. corrective maintenance.

Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.

Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operationsequence to be carried out is shown in “Troubleshooting” paragraph.

11.2.1 Periodical checks

System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating modeof an alarm–free system.

These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.

The items to be checked are:

• Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)

• Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)

• S/N (presence of possible interference)

• BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)

How these operations are carried out is specified in “Line–up” section or, more widely, in ALFOplus softwaremanual.

148 MN.00273.E - 005

11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)

Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.

Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verifiedthat the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.

Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of thesystem or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.

See paragraph 11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.

11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Main purpose of troubleshooting is to identify the possible cause of alarm:

• propagations of microwave

- interference (in a link radio turn off the Ptx module (local&remote) and monitoring the Prx duringthe day, active local Link ID)

- desalign of antenna (check positions and screws, maximize the voltage BNC connector presentin ODU),

- obstacle in the 1° Fresnel Zone (tree, tower building, etc....)

- using the “Performance Monitoring” Prx, Ptx, BER measuring

- particular condition (heavy rain, stratification of different air temperature, flat surface)

• radio hardware faulty

- alarms due to a wrong configurations or actual status of the radio

- faulty (using embedded radio BER test generator and loops, to check hardware failure)

• external event

- no constant 48 Volt power supply during the day/night

- very high temperature, humidity inside waveguide

- IDU operating range -5°C to +45°C; survival temperature range -10°C to +55°C

- ODU operating range -33°C to +55°C; survival temperature range -40°C to +60°C

- IDU operating humidity 95% at +35°C

- ODU waterproof according to IP65 environmental class

The troubleshooting procedure is performed with:

• check value of power transmitter and receiver

• reading Current Alarms and Alarm History labels and trying to figure out which part of the equip-ment is affected

• disabled All Manual Operations

• verifying with radio BER test a hardware failure or S/N measure

• verifying the correct initialization of the Local and Remote Radio

• HW restart

• factory default

• firmware update

• replace with a spare part.

MN.00273.E - 005 149

Section 6.PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

12.1 GENERAL

ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using SCT or WLC. This subject is fully described in the separatedsoftware manual (WebLCT ALFOplus - Software application for the management of ALFOplus equipment).

Warning: operating system compatibility for SCT and WLC is Windows XP or Windows 7.

12.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET

The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.

150 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.92 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit

12.2.1 General

In general the management plane can be configured to be managed “in band” , that is transported withdata and differentiated on the base of VLan, or out of band, where a port is exclusively dedicated to themanagement. In particular, for management purposed, the LAN interfaces can be configured as follow:

• Disable - the management is not transported for that LAN

• Local Access Only - LAN is dedicated to the management and it allows to reach the local CPU only

• In Band - LAN is configured to transport both management and data: management is differentiatedby dedicated VLan

• Out Of Band (OOB) - LAN is dedicated to the management and the management forwarded overthe radio is maintained segregated fro the data (in this application the segregation is virtuallyachieved via LAN)

• Drop Node - LAN is dedicated to the management and it is possible to access to both local CPU andthe rest of the network.

The combinations of management configuration for LAN1 and LAN2 are shown in the following.

Disable - Local Access Only (LAO)

LAN1: Disable LAN1 is for data only

LAN2: LAO LAN2 is local management only

LAN1

LAN2

Internal port

SWD Switcing Device

ControllerRate adapter

(fpga)

Mgt

Mac

Radio side

MN.00273.E - 005 151

Fig.93

• Management LAN2 Only - Untagged

• Reachability: From LAN2 only the local CPU is reachableLocal CPU is NOT reachable from the remote ODU

• Data LAN1 only - Tagged/Untagged

Disable - Out Of Band

LAN1: Disable LAN1 is for data only

LAN2: Out Of Band LAN2 is local management only, dedicated bandwidth for the management over the air

Fig.94

• Management LAN2 Only - Untaggeddedicated logical channel (bandwidth reserved over the radio link)

• Reachability: From LAN2: whole networkFrom Radio: whole network


InBand - Local Access Only

LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for data and management

LAN2: Local Access Only LAN2 is for local management only

152 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.95

• Management LAN1 - TaggedLAN2 - Untagged

• Reachability: From LAN1: whole networkFrom LAN2: only local P onlyFrom remote (portA): whole network


In Band - Drop Node

LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for both data and management

LAN2: Drop Node LAN2 is for management only

Fig.96

• Management LAN1 - Tagged (InBandVlan)LAN2 - Untagged

• Reachability: From LAN1: whole networkFrom LAN2: whole networkFrom radio: whole network

• Data LAN1 only - Tagged and Untagged

In Band - In Band

LAN1: In Band LAN1 and LAN2 are both for both data and management

LAN2: In Band

MN.00273.E - 005 153

Fig.97

• Management LAN1 - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)LAN2 - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)

• Reachability: From LAN1: whole networkFrom LAN2: whole networkFrom radio: whole network

• Data LAN1 and LAN2

In Band - Disable

LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for data and management

LAN2: In Band LAN2 is for data only

Fig.98

• Management LAN1 only - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)

• Reachability: From LAN1: whole networkFrom radio: whole network

• Data LAN1 and LAN2

154 MN.00273.E - 005

12.2.2 Configurability

The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,OAM, …). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,to avoid blocking traffic conditions.

In out of band a dedicated service channel for management does not exist, but this is forwarded to radioside using “internal Vlan stacking” with priority7, so that traffic IP with priority 7 could affect the speed ofmanagement traffic.

The disabling of PortA interface can cause outage of management and IP traffic.

12.2.3 Address

The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "defaultgateway".

12.2.4 Restore supervisioning access mode

The “RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS” command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hypertermi-nal (115200bps,n,8,1):

• Login SYSTEM

• Password SIAEMICR

• Type string: lao

This string restores the factory default of port configuration:

• LAN1 disable

• LAN2 local access only

MN.00273.E - 005 155

Section 7.COMPOSITION

13 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

13.1 GENERALS

There are several versions of ALFOplus, each of them with different hardware characteristics. If one ofthese is inserted improperly in local and remote side, radio link does not work.

Following statements:

• you must have 2 ODUs, the first one working in the lower selected subband and the second oneworking in the correspondent higher subband; e.g. 1L-1H, 2H - 2L, etc... (see Fig.99 and Fig.100).

Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

13.2 ODU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number (see Tab.33) shown on a label attached on each ODU.other information such as power consumption, allowed configuration, feature key, system version, partnumber P/N and serial number S/N are also written.

P/N consists of six digits with the following meaning (seeTab.32).

Tab.32 - ODU part number

Digit Letter/number Meaning

1 G Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure

2 B ALFOplus equipment

156 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.33 - ALFOplus versions

3

6 Optical Gigabit Interface with circulator

7 Optical Gigabit Interface without circulator

8 Electrical Gigabit Interface with circulator

9 Electrical Gigabit Interface without circulator

4 to 6 from 000 to 795

Code Description Go-return (MHz) RF/Subband

GB 6628 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 315/322 15 GHz 1L

GB 6629 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 315/322 15 GHz 1H









GB 6646 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 420 15 GHz 1L

GB 6647 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 420 15 GHz 1H


















MN.00273.E - 005 157







































158 MN.00273.E - 005







































MN.00273.E - 005 159
















GB 8606 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530/500 11 GHz 1L

GB 8607 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530/500 11 GHz 1H

GB 8608 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530 11 GHz 2L

GB 8609 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530 11 GHz 2H



GB 8612 ODU ALFOplus 13 GE 266 13 GHz 1L

GB 8613 ODU ALFOplus 13 GE 266 13 GHz 1H
















160 MN.00273.E - 005







































MN.00273.E - 005 161








GB 9474 ODU ALFOplus 7LM GE 161 7LM GHz 1L

GB 9475 ODU ALFOplus 7LM GE 161 7LM GHz 1H







GB 9518 ODU ALFOplus 7L GE 161 7L GHz 1L

GB 9519 ODU ALFOplus 7L GE 161 7L GHz 1H













GB 9534 ODU ALFOplus 7M GE 154 7M GHz 1L

GB 9535 ODU ALFOplus 7M GE 154 7M GHz 1H








162 MN.00273.E - 005












GB 9556 ODU ALFOplus 7H GE 245 7H GHz 1L

GB 9557 ODU ALFOplus 7H GE 245 7H GHz 1H


























MN.00273.E - 005 163







































164 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.99 - Label attached on ODU H
























MN.00273.E - 005 165

Fig.100 - Label attached on ODU L

166 MN.00273.E - 005

MN.00273.E - 005 167

Section 8.RF CHARACTERISTICS

14 INTRODUCTION

14.1 GENERALS

This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus.

168 MN.00273.E - 005

15 ALFOPLUS 7 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

15.1 FOREWORD

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.385-9 and CEPT Rec 02-06 for RF channel arrangement

• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio

• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:class 2.3)

• EN 60950-22 for Safety

• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces

15.2 GENERAL

The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.

15.2.1 Available frequencies

- Frequency band see Tab.40

Tab.34 - Frequency band

Frequency range (MHz)

Duplex spacing (MHz)

Reference recommendation

7125 - 7425 154 CEPT REC02-06

7425 - 7725 154 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 1CEPT REC 02-06

7125 - 7425 161 ITU-R F.385-9

7250 - 7550 161 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 5

7425 - 7725 161 ITU-R F.385-9

7110.5 - 7430.5 168 N.A. a

7443 - 7750 168 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 3

MN.00273.E - 005 169

- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity see Tab.41

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.42

- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.42

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.43 and Tab.44.

Tab.35 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.36 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 7GHz

7110 - 7443 196 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 3

7425 - 7900 245 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 4

a. The frequency channel arrangement for this frequency band is based on nationalregulations

ModulationType

Channel bandwidth (MHz)

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7125 ÷ 7425 MHz - GO-RETURN: 154 MHz CEPT REC 02-06 - f0=7275 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz] RF Filter Tuning Range [MHz]

1 7128 - 7184 7282 - 7338

562 7184 - 7240 7338 - 7394

3 7212 - 7268 7366 - 7422

4 7156 - 7212 7310 - 7366

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7425 ÷ 7725 MHz - GO-RETURN: 154 MHzITU-R F385-9 Annex 1 and CEPT REC 02-06- f0=7575 MHz

Sub BandLower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz] RF Filter Tuning Range

[MHz]AS ASN




170 MN.00273.E - 005

7 1 7428 - 7484 7582 - 7638

568 2 7484 - 7540 7638 - 7694

9 3 7512 - 7568 7666 - 7722

10 4 7456 - 7512 7610 - 7666

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7125 ÷ 7425 MHz - GO-RETURN: 161 MHzITU-R F385-9 - f0=7275 MHz


1 7124.5 - 7180.5 7285.5 - 7341.5

562 7180.5 - 7236.5 7341.5 - 7397.5

3 7208.5 - 7264.5 7369.5 - 7425.5

4 7152.5 - 7208.5 7313.5 - 7369.5

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7250 ÷ 7550 MHz - GO-RETURN: 161 MHzITU-R F385-9 Annex 5 - f0=7400 MHz


1 7249 - 7309 7410 - 7470

602 7305 - 7365 7466 - 7526

3 7333 - 7393 7494 - 7554

4 7277 - 7337 7438 - 7498



1 7424.5 - 7480.5 7585.5 - 7641.5

562 7480.5 - 7536.5 7641.5 - 7697.5

3 7508.5 - 7564.5 7669.5 - 7725.5

4a. 7452.5 - 7508.5 7613. - 7669.5

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7110.5 ÷ 7430.5 MHz - GO-RETURN: 168 MHzf0=7270.5 MHz


1 7110.5 - 7177.5 7278.5 - 7345.5

672 7166.5 - 7233.5 7334.5 - 7401.5

3 7194.5 - 7261.5 7362.5 - 7429.5

4 7138.5 - 7205.5 7306.5 - 7373.5



MN.00273.E - 005 171

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.37.

1 7443 - 7499 7611 - 7667

562 7499 - 7555 7667 - 7723

3 7527 - 7583 7695 - 7751

4 a 7471 - 7527 7639 - 7695



1 7107 - 7163 7303 - 7359

562 7163 - 7219 7359 - 7415

3 7191 - 7247 7387 - 7443

4 a. 7135 - 7191 7331 - 7387

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7425 ÷ 7900 MHz - GO-RETURN: 245 MHzITU-R F385-9 Annex 4 - f0=7662.5 MHz


1 7428 - 7512 7673 - 7757

842 7484 - 7568 7729 - 7813

3 7568 - 7652 7813 - 7897

4 a. 7540 - 7624 7785 - 7869

a. Subband 4 is available on request.

172 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.37 - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7125 ÷ 7425 MHz - GO-RETURN: 154 MHz - 56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]

Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Lowest Frequency Carrier [MHz]

Highest Frequency Carrier [MHz]



7 7131.5 7180.5 7285.5 7334.5

14 7135 7177 7289 7331

28 7142 7170 7296 7324

56 7156 7156 7310 7310

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7187.5 7263.5 7341.5 7390.5

14 7191 7233 7345 7387

28 7198 7226 7352 7380

56 7212 7212 7366 7366

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7215.5 7264.5 7369.5 7418.5

14 7219 7261 7373 7415

28 7226 7254 7380 7408

56 7240 7240 7394 7394

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7159.5 7208.5 7313.5 7362.5

14 7163 7205 7317 7359

28 7170 7198 7324 7352

56 7184 7184 7338 7338


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7431.5 7480.5 7585.5 7634.5

MN.00273.E - 005 173

14 7435 7477 7589 7631

28 7442 7470 7596 7624

56 7456 7456 7610 7610

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7487.5 7536.5 7641.5 7690.5

14 7491 7533 7645 7687

28 7498 7526 7652 7680

56 7512 7512 7666 7666

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7515.5 7564.5 7669.5 7718.5

14 7519 7561 7673 7715

28 7526 7554 7680 7708

56 7540 7540 7694 7694

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7459.5 7508.5 7613.5 7662.5

14 7463 7505 7617 7659

28 7470 7498 7624 7652

56 7484 7484 7638 7638


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7128 7177 7289 7338

14 7131.5 7173.5 7292.5 7334.5

28 7138.5 7166.5 7299.5 7327.5

56 7152.5 7152.5 7313.5 7313.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






174 MN.00273.E - 005

7 7184 7233 7345 7394

14 7187.5 7229.5 7348.5 7390.5

28 7194.5 7222.5 7355.5 7383.5

56 7208.5 7208.5 7369.5 7369.5

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7212 7261 7373 7422

14 7215.5 7257.5 7376.5 7418.5

28 7222.5 7250.5 7383.5 7411.5

56 7236.5 7236.5 7397.5 7397.5

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7156 7205 7317 7366

14 7159.5 7201.5 7320.5 7362.5

28 7166.5 7194.5 7327.5 7355.5

56 7180.5 7180.5 7341.5 7341.5


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7252.5 7305.5 7413.5 7466.5

14 7256 7302 7417 7463

28 7263 7295 7424 7456

56 7277 7281 7438 7442

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7308.5 7361.5 7469.5 7522.5

14 7312 7358 7473 7519

28 7319 7351 7480 7512

56 7333 7337 7494 7498

SUB BAND 3

MN.00273.E - 005 175

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7336.5 7389.5 7497.5 7550.5

14 7340 7386 7501 7547

28 7347 7379 7508 7540

56 7361 7365 7522 7526

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7280.5 7333.5 7441.5 7494.5

14 7284 7330 7445 7491

28 7291 7323 7452 7484

56 7305 7309 7466 7470


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7428 7477 7589 7638

14 7431.5 7473.5 7592.5 7634.5

28 7438.5 7466.5 7599.5 7627.5

56 7452.5 7452.5 7613.5 7613.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7484 7533 7645 7694

14 7487.5 7529.5 7648.5 7690.5

28 7494.5 7522.5 7655.5 7683.5

56 7508.5 7508.5 7669.5 7669.5

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7512 7561 7673 7722

14 7515.5 7557.5 7676.5 7718.5

28 7522.5 7550.5 7683.5 7711.5

56 7536.5 7536.5 7697.5 7697.5

176 MN.00273.E - 005

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7456 7505 7617 7666

14 7459.5 7501.5 7620.5 7662.5

28 7466.5 7494.5 7627.5 7655.5

56 7480.5 7480.5 7641.5 7641.5

FREQUENCY RANGE: 7110.5 ÷ 7430.5 MHz - GO-RETURN: 168 MHz - 67 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7114 7174 7282 7342

14 7117.5 7170.5 7285.5 7338.5

28 7124.5 7163.5 7292.5 7331.5

56 7138.5 7149.5 7306.5 7317.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7170 7230 7338 7398

14 7173.5 7226.5 7341.5 7394.5

28 7180.5 7219.5 7348.5 7387.5

56 7194.5 7205.5 7362.5 7373.5

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7198 7258 7366 7426

14 7201.5 7254.5 7369.5 7422.5

28 7208.5 7247.5 7376.5 7415.5

56 7222.5 7233.5 7390.5 7401.5

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7142 7202 7310 7370

14 7145.5 7198.5 7313.5 7366.5

28 7152.5 7191.5 7320.5 7359.5

MN.00273.E - 005 177

56 7166.5 7177.5 7334.5 7345.5


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7446.5 7495.5 7614.5 7663.5

14 7450 7492 7618 7660

28 7457 7485 7625 7653

56 7471 7471 7639 7639

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7502.5 7551.5 7670.5 7719.5

14 7506 7548 7674 7716

28 7513 7541 7681 7709

56 7527 7527 7695 7695

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7530.5 7579.5 7698.5 7747.5

14 7534 7576 7702 7744

28 7541 7569 7709 7737

56 7555 7555 7723 7723

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7474.5 7523.5 7642.5 7691.5

14 7478 7520 7646 7688

28 7485 7513 7653 7681

56 7499 7499 7667 7667


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7110.5 7159.5 7306.5 7355.5

178 MN.00273.E - 005

14 7114 7156 7310 7352

28 7121 7149 7317 7345

56 7135 7135 7331 7331

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7166.5 7215.5 7362.5 7411.5

14 7170 7212 7366 7408

28 7177 7205 7373 7401

56 7191 7191 7387 7387

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7194.5 7243.5 7390.5 7439.5

14 7198 7240 7394 7436

28 7205 7233 7401 7429

56 7219 7219 7415 7415

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7138.5 7187.5 7334.5 7383.5

14 7142 7184 7338 7380

28 7149 7177 7345 7373

56 7163 7163 7359 7359


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7431.5 7508.5 7676.5 7753.5

14 7435 7505 7680 7750

28 7442 7498 7687 7743

56 7456 7484 7701 7729

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






MN.00273.E - 005 179

7 7487.5 7564.5 7732.5 7809.5

14 7491 7561 7736 7806

28 7498 7554 7743 7799

56 7512 7540 7757 7785

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7571.5 7648.5 7816.5 7893.5

14 7575 7645 7820 7890

28 7582 7638 7827 7883

56 7596 7624 7841 7869

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 7543.5 7620.5 7788.5 7865.5

14 7547 7617 7792 7862

28 7554 7610 7799 7855

56 7568 7596 7813 7841

180 MN.00273.E - 005

15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics

- Maximum transmit power see Tab.47

Tab.38 - Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM profiles transmit the same output power level,that is equal to the Maximum transmit power indicated in the table above for the highest modulation level selected.Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the reference modulation transmit in Peak ConstantMode (i.e. each modulation transmits the outputpower indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode isfollowed.

- Tx bandwidth see Tab.42

- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHzsteps

- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB

- Attenuation Step 1 dB step

- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB

- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB

- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB

- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm±10 ppm (including ageing)

- Muting attenuation 60 dB

MODULATION Nominal Output Power [dBm]

Guaranteed Output Power [dBm]

Nominal Power Tolerance

4QAMs 28 26

±2 dB

4QAM 28 26

16QAMs 25 23

16QAM 25 23

32QAM 24 22

64QAM 24 22

128QAM 24 22

256QAM 24 22

512QAM 24 22

1024QAM 23 21

MN.00273.E - 005 181

15.2.3 Receiver characteristics

- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.36

- Noise Figure 6 dB

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 3 [dBm] see Tab.48

Tab.39 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities

- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6

±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm

- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12

3 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM

7BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5

BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

14BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.5 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

28BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0

56BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

BER=10-10 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

14BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

28BER=10-6 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

56BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

182 MN.00273.E - 005

16 ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS

16.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement

• FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101






16.2 GENERAL










10700 - 11700 530 CEPT T/R 12-06ITU-R F.387-10

10700 - 11700 490CEPT T/R 12-06ITU-R F.387-10

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

10700 - 11705 500 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

MN.00273.E - 005 183




Tab.41 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.42 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz

ModulationType


7 10 14 28 30 40 56

4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 32.956 35.117 46.462 65.912

4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 44.279 47.183 62.426 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 66.081 70.414 93.163 132.161

16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 85.854 91.484 121.040 171.708

32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 99.713 106.251 140.578 199.425

64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 123.373 131.463 173.936 246.746

128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 147.034 156.675 207.294 294.068

256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 170.694 181.887 240.651 341.389

512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 194.524 207.100 274.009 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 218.185 232.312 307.336 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz



1 10715 - 10895 11205 - 11385

1802 10875 - 11055 11365 - 11545

3 11035 - 11215 11525 - 11705

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 530 MHzCEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz


1 10695 - 10875 11225 - 11405

1802 10855 - 11035 11385 - 11565

3 11015 - 11195 11545 - 11725

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10.7 ÷ 11.7 MHz - GO-RETURN: 500 MHzFCC CFR Title 47 Part 101


1 10700 - 10730 11200 - 1123030

3 11170 - 11200 11670 - 11700

184 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.43 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10- GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 10718.5 10891.5 11208.5 11381.5

14 10722 10888 11212 11378

28 10729 10881 11219 11371

40 10735 10875 11225 11365

56 10743 10867 11233 11357

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 10878.5 11051.5 11368.5 11541.5

14 10882 11048 11372 11538

28 10889 11041 11379 11531

40 10895 11035 11385 11525

56 10903 11027 11393 11517

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 11038.5 11211.5 11528.5 11701.5

14 11042 11208 11532 11698

28 11049 11201 11539 11691

40 11055 11195 11545 11685

56 11063 11187 11553 11677

MN.00273.E - 005 185

Tab.44 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

Tab.45 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 10698.5 10871.5 11228.5 11401.5

14 10702 10868 11232 11398

28 10709 10861 11239 11391

40 10715 10855 11245 11385

56 10723 10847 11253 11377

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 10858.5 11031.5 11388.5 11561.5

14 10862 11028 11392 11558

28 10869 11021 11399 11551

40 10875 11015 11405 11545

56 10883 11007 11413 11537

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 11018.5 11191.5 11548.5 11721.5

14 11022 11188 11552 11718

28 11029 11181 11559 11711

40 11035 11175 11565 11705

56 11043 11167 11573 11697

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101Go-Return: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 10720 10890 11210 11380

30 10730 10880 11220 11370

186 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.46 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits

40 10735 10875 11225 11365

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 11880 11050 11370 11540

30 11890 11040 11380 11530

40 11895 11035 11385 11525

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 11040 11210 11530 11700

30 11050 11200 11540 11690

40 11055 11195 11545 11685

FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101Go-Return: 500 MHz - 30 MHz RF filter tuning range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 10705 10725 11205 11225

30 10715 10715 11215 11215

40 - - - -

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 11175 11195 11675 11695

30 11185 11185 11685 11685

40 - - - -

MN.00273.E - 005 187















- Muting attenuation 60 dB




4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

188 MN.00273.E - 005


- Receiver bandwidth See Table 2

- Noise Figure 6.5 dB


Tab.48



7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

10BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

30BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0

40BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0


7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

10BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

30BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

40BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

MN.00273.E - 005 189





BER=10-6




190 MN.00273.E - 005


17.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement


• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply

• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:class 2.3).



17.2 GENERAL







- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.51)



Frequency Range [GHz] Duplex Spacing [MHz] Reference Recommendation

12.75 ÷ 13.25 266 ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02

MN.00273.E - 005 191

Tab.50 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

Tab.51 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz

Modulation typeChannel bandwidth [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - f0=12996 MHz


1 12751 ÷ 12835 13017 ÷ 13101

842 12835 ÷ 12919 13101 ÷ 13185

3 12891 ÷ 12975 13157 ÷ 13241

4 12779 ÷ 12863 13045 ÷ 13129

192 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.52 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel band-width [MHz]






7 12754.5 12831.5 13020.5 13097.5

14 12758 12828 13024 13094

28 12765 12821 13031 13087

56 12779 12807 13045 13073

SUB BAND 2







7 12838.5 12915.5 13104.5 13181.5

14 12842 12912 13108 13178

28 12849 12905 13115 13171

56 12863 12891 13129 13157

SUB BAND 3







7 12894.5 12971.5 13160.5 13237.5

14 12898 12968 13164 13234

28 12905 12961 13171 13227

56 12919 12947 13185 13213

SUB BAND 4







7 12782.5 12866.5 13048.5 13132.5

14 12786 12870 13052 13136

28 12793 12877 13059 13143

56 12807 12891 13073 13157

MN.00273.E - 005 193
















Guaranteed Output Power [dBm] Nominal Power Tolerance

4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

194 MN.00273.E - 005


- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.51



Tab.54 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]



- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @ BER=10-6


BER=10-6

- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm





7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

64QAM 128QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM

7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

MN.00273.E - 005 195


18.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement






18.2 GENERAL








14501 - 15348 420 ITU-R F.636

14403 - 15348 490 ITU-R F.636

14501 - 15348 728 CEPT T/R 12-07

14613 - 15251 322 N.A.

14620 - 15244 315 N.A:

196 MN.00273.E - 005




- Transceiver tuning range: see Tab.56

Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.57, Tab.58, Tab.59, Tab.60, Tab.61 and Tab.62.

Tab.56 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

ModulationType


7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

MN.00273.E - 005 197

Tab.57 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz

FREQUENCY RANGE:14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - ITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz


1 14500 - 14620 14920 - 15040

1202 14612 - 14732 15032 - 15152

3 14724 - 14844 15144 - 15264

4 14808 - 14928 15228 - 15348

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - ITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz


1 14402 - 14522 14892 - 15012

1202 14514 - 14634 15004 - 15124

3 14626 - 14746 15116 - 15236

4 14738 - 14858 15228 - 15348

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-07 - f0=14924MHz


1 14500 - 14620 15228 - 15348 120

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 322 MHz


1 14613 - 14705 14935 - 15027

92

2 14669 - 14761 14991 - 15083

3 14725 - 14817 15047 - 15139

4 14781 - 14873 15103 - 15195

5 14837 - 14929 15159 - 15251

FREQUENCY RANGE: 14600 ÷ 15240 MHz - GO-RETURN: 315 MHz


1 14620 - 14705 14935 - 15020

85

2 14676 - 14761 14991 - 15076

3 14732 - 14817 15047 - 15132

4 14788 - 14873 15103 - 15188

5 14844 - 14929 15159 - 15244

198 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.58 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14503.5 14616.5 14923.5 15036.5

14 14507 14613 14927 15033

28 14514 14606 14934 15026

56 14528 14592 14948 15012

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14615.5 14728.5 15035.5 15148.5

14 14619 14725 15039 15145

28 14626 14718 15046 15138

56 14640 14704 15060 15124

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14727.5 14840.5 15147.5 15260.5

14 14731 14837 15151 15257

28 14738 14830 15158 15250

56 14752 14816 15172 15236

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14811.5 14931.5 15231.5 15351.5

14 14815 14935 15235 15355

28 14822 14942 15242 15362

56 14836 14956 15256 15376

MN.00273.E - 005 199

Tab.59 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14405.5 14518.5 14895.5 15008.5

14 14409 14515 14899 15005

28 14416 14508 14906 14998

56 14430 14494 14920 14984

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14517.5 14630.5 15007.5 15120.5

14 14521 14627 15011 15117

28 14528 14620 15018 15110

56 14542 14606 15032 15096

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14629.5 14742.5 15119.5 15232.5

14 14633 14739 15123 15229

28 14640 14732 15130 15222

56 14654 14718 15144 15208

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14741.5 14861.5 15231.5 15351.5

14 14745 14865 15235 15355

28 14752 14872 15242 15362

56 14766 14886 15256 15376

200 MN.00273.E - 005



SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14503.5 14616.5 15231.5 15344.5

14 14507 14613 15235 15341

28 14514 14606 15242 15334

56 14528 14592 15256 15320

MN.00273.E - 005 201



SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14616.5 14701.5 14938.5 15023.5

14 14620 14698 14942 15020

28 14627 14691 14949 15013

56 14641 14677 14963 14999

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14672.5 14757.5 14994.5 15079.5

14 14676 14754 14998 15076

28 14683 14747 15005 15069

56 14697 14733 15019 15055

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14728.5 14813.5 15050.5 15135.5

14 14732 14810 15054 15132

28 14739 14803 15061 15125

56 14753 14789 15075 15111

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14784.5 14869.5 15106.5 15191.5

14 14788 14866 15110 15188

28 14795 14859 15117 15181

56 14809 14845 15131 15167

SUB BAND 5

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14840.5 14925.5 15162.5 15247.5

14 14844 14922 15166 15244

28 14851 14915 15173 15237

56 14865 14901 15187 15223

202 MN.00273.E - 005



SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14623.5 14701.5 14938.5 15016.5

14 14627 14698 14942 15013

28 14634 14691 14949 15006

56 14648 14677 14963 14992

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14679.5 14757.5 14994.5 15072.5

14 14683 14754 14998 15069

28 14690 14747 15005 15062

56 14704 14733 15019 15048

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14735.5 14813.5 15050.5 15128.5

14 14739 14810 15054 15125

28 14746 14803 15061 15118

56 14760 14789 15075 15104

SUB BAND 4

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14791.5 14869.5 15106.5 15184.5

14 14795 14866 15110 15181

28 14802 14859 15117 15174

56 14816 14845 15131 15160

SUB BAND 5

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 14847.5 14925.5 15162.5 15240.5

14 14851 14922 15166 15237

28 14858 14915 15173 15230

56 14872 14901 15187 15216

MN.00273.E - 005 203



Tab.63 -Maximum transmit power

- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM profiles transmit the same output power level,that is equal to the Maximum transmit power indicated in the table above for the highest modulation level selected.Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the reference modulation transmit in Peak ConstantMode (i.e. each modulation transmits the outputpower indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is followed.


- Frequency agility Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHzsteps









- Muting attenuation 60 db




4QAMs 27 25

±2 dB

4QAM 27 25

16QAMs 24 22

16QAM 24 22

32QAM 23 21

64QAM 23 21

128QAM 23 21

256QAM 23 21

512QAM 23 21

1024QAM 22 20

204 MN.00273.E - 005


- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.56


- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] 6 see Tab.64


- Rx Spurious emissions According to ETSI EN 301 390

- AGC dynamic range From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25° C (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷Thresholds @BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷Thresholds @

BER=10-6




6 Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower


7BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

14BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0

28BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5

56BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0


7BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

14BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

28BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

56BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

MN.00273.E - 005 205


19.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• CEPT ERC REC 70-03

• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio





19.2 GENERAL










FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz] DUPLEX SPACING [MHz]

REFERENCE RECOMMENDATION

17100 ÷ 17300 95 ÷193 BEPT ERC REC 70-03

206 MN.00273.E - 005



Tab.68 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

MODULATION TYPECHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz] RF Filter Range [MHz]

1 17100 ÷ 17156 17244 ÷ 17300 56

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz - 56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 17103.5 17152.5 17247.5 17296.5

14 17107 17149 17251 17293

28 17114 17142 17258 17286

56 17128 17128 17272 17272

MN.00273.E - 005 207


- Maximum transmit power7 see Tab.77













- Muting attenuation: 60 dB

7 The maximum e.i.r.p. stated in CEPT ERC REC 70 Rec. should be 100mW




4QAMs 22 20

±2 dB

4QAM 22 20

16QAMs 20 18

16QAM 20 18

32QAM 18 16

64QAM 18 16

128QAM 18 16

256QAM 18 16

512QAM 18 16

1024QAM 17 15

208 MN.00273.E - 005



- Noise Figure 8 dB

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities8 [dBm] see Tab.78






BER=10-6




8 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.


7BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

14BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5

28BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0

BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0

56BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5

BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5


7BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5

14BER=10-6 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

BER=10-10 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5

28BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0

56BER=10-6 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

BER=10-10 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

MN.00273.E - 005 209


20.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement


• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio





20.2 GENERAL









FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz] DUPLEX SPACING [MHz]


17700 ÷ 19700 1010 ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03

17700 ÷ 19700 1560 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7

17700 ÷ 19700 1560 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

210 MN.00273.E - 005





7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56

4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 32.117 46.462 58.078 65.912

4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161

16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708

32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425

64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.373 173.936 217.420 246.746

128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068

256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389

512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.683 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1010 MHzITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz


1 17699 ÷ 18058 18709 ÷ 19068 359

2 18016 ÷ 18375 19026 ÷ 19385 359

3 18332 ÷ 18691 19342 ÷ 19701 359

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7



1 17700 ÷ 18140 19260 ÷ 19700 440

MN.00273.E - 005 211

Tab.74 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex7- GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth [MHz] a

a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel spacing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz re-spectively






7 17702.5 18054.5 18712.5 19064.5

14 17706 18051 18716 19061

28 17712.75 18044.25 18722.75 19054.25

56 17726.5 18030.5 18736.5 19040.5

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth [MHz] a.






7 18019.5 18371.5 19029.5 19381.5

14 18023 18368 19033 19378

28 18029.75 18361.25 19039.75 19371.25

56 18043.5 18347.5 19053.5 19357.5

SUB BAND 3







7 18335.5 18687.5 19345.5 19697.5

14 18339 18684 19349 19694

28 18345.75 18677.25 19355.75 19687.25

56 18359.5 18663.5 19369.5 19673.5

212 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.75 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

Tab.76 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1







7 17703.5 18136.5 19263.5 19696.5

14 17707 18133 19267 19693

28 17713.75 18126.25 19273.75 19686.25

56 17727.5 18112.5 19287.5 19672.5

FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1







10 17705 18135 19265 19695

20 17710 18130 19270 19690

30 17715 18125 19275 19685

40 17720 18120 19280 19680

50 17725 18115 19295 19675

MN.00273.E - 005 213















- Muting attenuation: 60 dB






4QAMs 23 21

±2 dB

4QAM 23 21

16QAMs 21 19

16QAM 21 19

32QAM 19 17

64QAM 19 17

128QAM 19 17

256QAM 19 17

512QAM 19 17

1024QAM 18 16

214 MN.00273.E - 005

- Noise Figure 7 dB



9 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.


7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

10BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5

20BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0

30BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5

40BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0

50BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5


7BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

10BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

20BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

30BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

MN.00273.E - 005 215





BER=10-6




40BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

50BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

216 MN.00273.E - 005


21.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement







21.2 GENERAL





- Modulation scheme: 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM

- Capacity: see Tab.80

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING [MHz]


22000 ÷ 23600 1008 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3CEPT T/R 13-02

21200 ÷ 23600 1232 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1

21200 ÷ 23600 1200 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4

21200 ÷ 23600 1200 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

MN.00273.E - 005 217

- RF filter range: Wide Filter Option see Tab.81

- Transceiver tuning range: See Tab.81

The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.82, Tab.83 and Tab.84.

Tab.80 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment



7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56

4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 35.117 46.462 58.078 65.912

4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161

16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708

32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425

64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.463 173.936 217.420 246.746

128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068

256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389

512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.529 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHzITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz


1 22002.75 ÷ 22338.75 23010.75 ÷ 23346.75336

2 22254.75 ÷ 22590.75 23262.75 ÷ 23598.75

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHzITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz


1 21224 ÷ 21616 22456 ÷ 22848 392

2 21616 ÷ 22008 22848 ÷ 23240 392

3 22008 ÷ 22344 23240 ÷ 23576 336

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHzITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz



1 21200 ÷ 21605.5 22400 ÷ 22805.5 405.5

2 21600 ÷ 22000 22800 ÷ 23200 400

3 21997.5 ÷ 22400 23197.5 ÷ 23600 402.5

218 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.82 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 3 - 336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 22006.25 22335.25 23014.25 23343.25

14 22009.75 22331.75 23017.75 23339.75

28 22016.75 22324.75 23024.75 23332.75

56 22030.75 22310.75 23038.75 23318.75

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 22258.25 22587.25 23266.25 23595.25

14 22261.75 22583.75 23269.75 23591.75

28 22268.75 22576.75 23276.75 23584.75

56 22282.75 22562.75 23290.75 23570.75

MN.00273.E - 005 219

Tab.83 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - 392-336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 21227.5 21612.5 22459.5 22844.5

14 21231 21609 22463 22841

28 21238 21602 22470 22834

56 21252 21588 22484 22820

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 21619.5 22004.5 22851.5 23236.5

14 21623 22001 22855 23233

28 21630 21994 22862 23226

56 21644 21980 22876 23212

SUB BAND 3

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 22011.5 22340.5 23243.5 23572.5

14 22015 22337 23247 23569

28 22022 22330 23254 23562

56 22036 22316 23268 23548

220 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.84 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits

Tab.85 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - 400 - 403.5 - 405.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






7 21217 21602 22417 22802

14 21220.5 21598.5 22420.5 22798.5

28 21227.5 21591.5 22427.5 22791.5

56 21241.5 21577.5 22441.5 22777.5

SUB BAND 2

Channelbandwidth

[MHz]






7 21609 21994 22809 23194

14 21612.5 21990.5 22812.5 23190.5

28 21619.5 21983.5 22819.5 23183.5

56 21633.5 21969.5 22833.5 23169.5

SUB BAND 3







7 22001 22386 23201 23586

14 22004.5 22382.5 23204.5 23582.5

28 22011.5 22375.5 23211.5 23575.5

56 22025.5 22361.5 23225.5 23561.5

FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - 405.5-400-403.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range

SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

[MHz]






10 21205 21600.5 22405 22800.5

20 21210 21595.5 22410 22795.5

30 21215 21590.5 22415 22790.5

40 21220 21585.5 22420 22785.5

MN.00273.E - 005 221

50 21225 21580.5 22425 21780.5

SUB BAND 2

Channelbandwidth

[MHz]






10 21605 21995 22805 23195

20 21610 21990 22810 23190

30 21615 21985 22815 23185

40 21620 21980 22820 23180

50 21625 21975 22825 23175

SUB BAND 3







10 22002.5 22395 23202.5 23586

20 22007.5 22390 23207.5 23590

30 22012.5 22385 23212.5 23585

40 22017.5 22380 23217.5 23580

50 22022.5 22375 23222.5 23575

222 MN.00273.E - 005






- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz steps













4QAMs 23 21

±2 dB

4QAM 23 21

16QAMs 21 19

16QAM 21 19

32QAM 19 17

64QAM 19 17

128QAM 19 17

256QAM 19 17

512QAM 19 17

1024QAM 18 16

MN.00273.E - 005 223



- Noise figure 7 dB



10 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower


7BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

10BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

14BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5

20BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0

28BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0

30BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5

40BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0

BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0

50BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

56BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5


7BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

10BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

20BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0

28BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

224 MN.00273.E - 005




- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

- whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @BER=10-6

- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm



30BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5

40BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0

50BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

MN.00273.E - 005 225


22.1 FOREWORD


• EN 301 489-4 for EMC

• ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement






22.2 GENERAL





- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM





FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]

DUPLEX SPACING [MHz]


37000 ÷ 39500 1260 ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01

226 MN.00273.E - 005



Tab.91 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits


7 14 28 56

4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912

4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558

16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161

16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708

32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425

64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746

128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068

256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389

512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048

1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

FREQUENCY RANGE: 37058 ÷ 39438 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1260 MHzITU-R F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz]

Upper Half Limits [MHz]

RF Filter Tuning Range [MHz]

1 37058 ÷ 37618 38318 ÷ 38878560

2 37618 ÷ 38178 38878 ÷ 39438


SUB BAND 1

Channel bandwidth

(MHz)


Lowest Frequency Carrier (MHz)

Highest Frequency Carrier (MHz)



7 37061.5 37614.5 38321.5 38874.5

14 37065 37611 38325 38871

28 37072 37604 38332 38864

56 37086 37590 38346 38850

SUB BAND 2

Channel bandwidth

(MHz)






7 37621.5 38174.5 38881.5 39434.5

14 37625 38171 38885 39431

28 37632 38164 38892 39424

56 37646 38150 38906 39410

MN.00273.E - 005 227




- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM profiles transmit the same output power level,that is equal to the Maximum transmit power indicated in the table above for the highest modulation level selected.Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the reference modulation transmit in Peak ConstantMode (i.e. each modulation transmits the outputpower indicated in the table above). Below thereference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is followed.












MODULATION Nominal Output Power (dBm)

Guaranteed Output Power (dBm)


4QAMs 19 17

±2 dB

4QAM 19 17

16QAMs 17 15

16QAM 17 15

32QAM 15 13

64QAM 15 13

128QAM 15 13

256QAM 15 13

512QAM 15 13

1024QAM 14 12

228 MN.00273.E - 005



- Noise Figure 9 dB

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities11 (dBm) see Tab.93

Tab.93 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)



- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @ BER=10-6


BER=10-6




11 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower


7BER=10-6 -90.5 -88 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

BER=10-10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5

14BER=10-6 -89.5 -86 -83 -79.5 -77.5

BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -77.5 -75.5

28BER=10-6 -86.5 -83 -79.5 -76.5 -75

BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0

56BER=10-6 -83.5 -80 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5


7BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5

14BER=10-6 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

BER=10-10 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

28BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0

56BER=10-6 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-10 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

MN.00273.E - 005 229

Section 9.LISTS AND SERVICES

23 LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10

Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10

Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 10

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11

Fig.6 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 20

Fig.7 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector) ...................................................................... 49

Fig.8 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector) ...................................................................... 49

Fig.9 - PoE injector interface........................................................................................... 50

Fig.10 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 54

Fig.11 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 55

Fig.12 - ALFOplus block diagram ..................................................................................... 57

Fig.13 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 59

Fig.14 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 61

Fig.15 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 62

Fig.16 -........................................................................................................................ 65

Fig.17 - Red curve......................................................................................................... 66

Fig.18 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled................................................................. 68

Fig.19 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled ................................................................. 68

Fig.20 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 70

Fig.21 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains ...................................................... 72

Fig.22 - NodeB and BTS synch ........................................................................................ 76

Fig.23 - SETS circuit ...................................................................................................... 76

Fig.24 - Synchronisation menu........................................................................................ 77

Fig.25 - Sources of synchronisation ................................................................................. 78

Fig.26 - Provide synchronism .......................................................................................... 79

230 MN.00273.E - 005

Fig.27 - LAN synchronisation method ............................................................................... 81

Fig.28 - Grounding connection ........................................................................................ 85

Fig.29 - Components ..................................................................................................... 93

Fig.30 - Recommended tools (not included) ...................................................................... 93

Fig.31 .......................................................................................................................... 94

Fig.32 .......................................................................................................................... 94

Fig.33 .......................................................................................................................... 95

Fig.34 .......................................................................................................................... 95

Fig.35 .......................................................................................................................... 96

Fig.36 .......................................................................................................................... 97

Fig.37 - On pole ............................................................................................................ 97

Fig.38 - Wall mounted.................................................................................................... 97

Fig.39 - ODU with standard coupling kit ........................................................................... 98

Fig.40 - 1+0 ODU installation.......................................................................................... 99

Fig.41 - 1+0 antenna flange ......................................................................................... 100

Fig.42 - Functional drawing........................................................................................... 102

Fig.43 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector ............................................................... 102

Fig.44 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)..................................................... 102

Fig.45 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view .............................. 103

Fig.46 - T-568A Straight-Through Ethernet cable............................................................. 105

Fig.47 - RJ-45 Pinout ................................................................................................... 105

Fig.48 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly ...................................................................... 105

Fig.49 - P20032 kit...................................................................................................... 106

Fig.50 - Boot connector................................................................................................ 106

Fig.51 - Assembled Amphenol ....................................................................................... 107

Fig.52 - Cable connector keys ....................................................................................... 108

Fig.53 - Connector housing........................................................................................... 109

Fig.54 - Connector tight ............................................................................................... 109

Fig.55 - PO0032.......................................................................................................... 110

Fig.56 - Connector positions ......................................................................................... 111

Fig.57 - Locking key for Amph. connectors - J23599 ........................................................ 112

Fig.58 - Assembled connectors...................................................................................... 113

Fig.59 - IDU-ODU optical connection .............................................................................. 115

Fig.60 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only.................................................................. 117

Fig.61 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)............................ 118

Fig.62 - ALFOplus connectors........................................................................................ 119

Fig.63 - SFP LC/LC ...................................................................................................... 119

Fig.64 - SFP LC/OPEN END ........................................................................................... 119

Fig.65 - SFP LC/ SFP LC ............................................................................................... 120

Fig.66 - LC connector................................................................................................... 120

Fig.67 - SFP/LC connector locked .................................................................................. 120

Fig.68 - SFP/LC connector check ................................................................................... 120

Fig.69 - SFP into ALFOplus............................................................................................ 121

MN.00273.E - 005 231

Fig.70 - Locked connection ........................................................................................... 121

Fig.71 - Unplug SFP..................................................................................................... 122

Fig.72 - Connection option............................................................................................ 125

Fig.73 - IP address setting............................................................................................ 126

Fig.74 - Login connection using SCT............................................................................... 126

Fig.75 - Rescue login using SCT .................................................................................... 127

Fig.76 - Web LCT console ............................................................................................. 127

Fig.77 - Rescue connection using WLC ........................................................................... 128

Fig.78 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID ................................................................. 129

Fig.79 - Frequency and power setting ............................................................................ 130

Fig.80 - Port configuration ............................................................................................ 130

Fig.81 - Equipment properties ....................................................................................... 131

Fig.82 ........................................................................................................................ 131

Fig.83 - Remote element list ......................................................................................... 132

Fig.84 - Main menu with Rx signal power level ................................................................ 134

Fig.85 - S/N measurement monitoring ........................................................................... 134

Fig.86 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment..................................................................... 135

Fig.87 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 136

Fig.88 - Remote accessing............................................................................................ 137

Fig.89 - Software download procedure ........................................................................... 140

Fig.90 - Upgrade software ............................................................................................ 140

Fig.91 - Backup/Restore configuration............................................................................ 142

Fig.92 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit............................................................... 150

Fig.93 ........................................................................................................................ 151

Fig.94 ........................................................................................................................ 151

Fig.95 ........................................................................................................................ 152

Fig.96 ........................................................................................................................ 152

Fig.97 ........................................................................................................................ 153

Fig.98 ........................................................................................................................ 153

Fig.99 - Label attached on ODU H.................................................................................. 164

Fig.100 - Label attached on ODU L ................................................................................ 165

232 MN.00273.E - 005

MN.00273.E - 005 233

24 LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9

Tab.2 - RF channel arrangement ......................................................................................21

Tab.3 - Tx power............................................................................................................23

Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled) ................................................................24

Tab.5 - Noise figure........................................................................................................36

Tab.6 - Max RSL Thresold................................................................................................37

Tab.7 - ACM switching thresholds .....................................................................................37

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus .....................................................41

Tab.9 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression and fragmentation.................................................................................................................43

Tab.10 - Interface characteristics .....................................................................................47

Tab.11 - Power consumption (W) .....................................................................................47

Tab.12 - PoE injector supported .......................................................................................48

Tab.13 - Code Table .......................................................................................................49

Tab.14 - Electrical characteristics .....................................................................................50

Tab.15 - Connectors .......................................................................................................50

Tab.16 - Description of alarms .........................................................................................50

Tab.17 - Type ................................................................................................................51

Tab.18 - Maximum length................................................................................................51

Tab.19 - Dimensions.......................................................................................................52

Tab.20 - Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................86

Tab.21 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................90

Tab.22 - Accessories for installation..................................................................................91

Tab.23 - Auxiliary power cable .......................................................................................101

Tab.24 - Pinout M12 connector.......................................................................................103

Tab.25 - Part to be assembled .......................................................................................103

Tab.26 - MDI(EIA/TIA T568A) ........................................................................................104

Tab.27 - List of Amphenol optical cable ...........................................................................114

Tab.28 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port.....................................................................133

Tab.29 - Ethernet connection stability .............................................................................137

Tab.30 - Bootstrap status display ...................................................................................144

Tab.31 - Alarms ...........................................................................................................145

Tab.32 - ODU part number ............................................................................................155

Tab.33 - ALFOplus versions ..........................................................................................156

Tab.34 - Frequency band...............................................................................................168

Tab.35 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..169

Tab.36 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 7GHz ...................................................................169

234 MN.00273.E - 005

Tab.37 - Frequency carrier limits ....................................................................................172

Tab.38 - Maximum transmit power .................................................................................180

Tab.39 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities ......................................................................181


Tab.41 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..183

Tab.42 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz..................................................................183

Tab.43 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .........184

Tab.44 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .........185

Tab.45 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits ......................................................................................................185

Tab.46 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 500 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits ......................................................................................................186


Tab.48 ........................................................................................................................188


Tab.50 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .191

Tab.51 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz..............................................................191

Tab.52 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................192

Tab.53 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................193

Tab.54 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]..............................................................194


Tab.56 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..196

Tab.57 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz.............................................................197

Tab.58 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............198

Tab.59 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits..................199




Tab.63 -Maximum transmit power .................................................................................203





Tab.68 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ........206

Tab.69 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................207





Tab.74 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits .............211

Tab.75 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ...............................................................................................212

Tab.76 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits.................................212

MN.00273.E - 005 235




Tab.80 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment ..217


Tab.82 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ..................................................................218

Tab.83 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits ......................................................................................................219

Tab.84 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequen-cy carrier limits .............................................................................................................220

Tab.85 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz - Fre-quency carrier limits ......................................................................................................220


Tab.87 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] .............................................................223




Tab.91 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits ......226


Tab.93 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)..............................................................228

236 MN.00273.E - 005

MN.00273.E - 005 237

25 ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-pany manufacturing the product.

238 MN.00273.E - 005

Documents

mn00273e v5 Alfoplus